2007 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2006-08-28 · Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 38Airbag System ........................................ 64Restraint System Check ......................... 82

Features and Controls ................................ 85Keys ....................................................... 87Doors and Locks .................................... 92Windows ................................................ 99Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 101Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 106Mirrors .................................................. 121OnStar® System ................................... 125

Universal Home Remote System .......... 128Storage Areas ...................................... 139Moonroof .............................................. 144

Instrument Panel ....................................... 145Instrument Panel Overview ................... 148Climate Controls ................................... 167Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 174Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 194Audio System(s) ................................... 212

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 263Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 264Towing ................................................. 302

2007 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 319Service ................................................. 322Fuel ...................................................... 324Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 329All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 368Rear Axle ............................................. 369Front Axle ............................................ 370Headlamp Aiming ................................. 371Bulb Replacement ................................ 371Windshield Replacement ....................... 377Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 377Tires ..................................................... 380

Appearance Care .................................. 423Vehicle Identification ............................. 433Electrical System .................................. 434Capacities and Specifications ................ 445

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 447Maintenance Schedule .......................... 448

Customer Assistance Information ............. 465Customer Assistance and Information ..... 466Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 479

Index .......................................................... 483

2

Saab Automobile, Saab Cars USA, SAAB, Saab9-7X, 9-7X and the Saab Emblem are registeredtrademarks of Saab Automobile, AB.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Saab Automobile, AB whenever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863676 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar .............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 11Power Reclining Seatbacks ......................... 13Head Restraints .......................................... 15

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Rear Seat Operation ................................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers

About Safety Belts ................................... 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23Driver Position ............................................. 24Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 31Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32

Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 32Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 35Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 37Safety Belt Extender ................................... 37

Child Restraints ............................................ 38Older Children ............................................. 38Infants and Young Children ......................... 40Child Restraint Systems .............................. 44Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 48Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 50Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Outside Seat Position ...................... 57Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Rear Seat Position ....................... 59Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 60

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 64Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 67When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 70What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 72How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 72What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 73Passenger Sensing System ......................... 74

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 80Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 81Restraint System Check ............................... 82

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 82Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 83

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Power Seats

The power seat controlsare located on theoutboard side ofthe seat cushions.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire horizontal control up or down.

• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 13.

Power LumbarYour vehicle has power lumbar on the driver’s andfront passenger’s seats.

The seatback lumbarsupport can be adjustedby moving the controllocated on the outboardside of the seatcushions.

To increase or decrease support, hold the controlforward or rearward.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

9

Heated Seats

Your vehicle has heatedfront seats. The buttonsused to control thisfeature are located onthe front door armrests.The engine must berunning for the heatedseat feature to work.

To heat the entire seat, press the horizontalbutton with the heated seat and seatbacksymbol. Press the button to cycle throughthe temperature settings of high, medium,and low and to turn the heated seat off.

The indicator lights above the button will come on todesignate the level of heat selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low. The low settingwarms the seatback and seat cushion until the seattemperature is near body temperature. The mediumand high settings heat the seatback and seatcushion to a slightly higher temperature. Youwill be able to feel heat in about two minutes.

To heat only the seatback, press the vertical buttonwith the heated seatback symbol. An indicatorlight on the button will come on to designate thatonly the seatback is being heated. Additionalpresses will cycle through the heat levels for theseatback only.The feature will shut off automatically when theignition is turned off.

10

Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals

The controls for thememory functionare located on thedriver’s door.

These buttons are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver’s seating position,both outside mirror positions, and the adjustablepedals, if equipped. The settings for these featurescan be saved for up to two drivers.

To store the memory settings, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to thedesired position.See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal onpage 110 for more information.

2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memorycontrol for three seconds. A double chime willsound to let you know that the position hasbeen stored.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver,follow the preceding steps, but press the othernumbered memory control button.

11

To recall the memory settings, do one of thefollowing:

• Press and release button 1 or 2 while thevehicle is in PARK (P). A single chimewill sound and the memory position will berecalled.

• If programmed to do so through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), pressing theunlock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter will recall the presetdriver’s memory seat, mirrors, and adjustablepedals position.

• If programmed to do so through the DIC,placing the key in the ignition will recallthe driver’s memory seat, mirrors, andadjustable pedals positions.

See “Seat Recall” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 205 for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory seatfeature at any time, press one of the memorybuttons or power seat controls.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for the easy exit seat function is locatedon the driver’s door below the memorybuttons 1 and 2. The easy exit seat button is usedto program and recall the desired driver’s seatposition when exiting or entering the vehicle. Themirrors, power lumbar, recline, and adjustablepedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored orrecalled when using the easy exit seat function.The seat position can be saved for up to twodrivers.

To store the easy exit seat position, do thefollowing:

1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of thememory control for less than three seconds.The seat will move to the stored memoryposition.

2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.

3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button formore than three seconds. A double chime willsound to let you know that the position hasbeen stored for the selected button 1 or 2.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver,follow the preceding steps, but press the othernumbered memory control button.

12

To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the easy exit seat button on thememory control while the vehicle is inPARK (P). The seat will move to the storedexit position.

• Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated inthe Driver Information Center (DIC), removingthe key from the ignition will move the seatto the exit position. See “Easy Exit Seat” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 205 formore information on activating this feature inthe DIC.

If an easy exit seat position has not been stored,the default position is all the way rearward.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

The front seats havepower recliningseatbacks. Use thevertical power seatcontrol located on theoutboard side of theseat to operate them.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the control towardthe front of the vehicle.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

14

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reducesthe chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button,located on the top of the seatback, and push thehead restraint down.

15

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationYour vehicle has flip and fold second row seatswhich provide additional cargo space.

To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following:

1. Pull up on the loop located where the seatcushion meets the seatback and flip theseat cushion forward.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever,located on theoutboard side ofthe seatback,and fold theseatback forward.

The head restraint will automatically fold outof the way as the seatback is folded down.

16

To return the seat(s) to the original position, dothe following:

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the uprightposition. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

2. Return the head restraints to the uprightposition by reaching behind the seat andpulling it forward until it locks into place. Pushand pull on the head restraint to make surethat it is locked.

3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.

17

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seatand using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 177 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 177.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

18

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between. Inmany of them, people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk away. Without belts they couldhave been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

19

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

20

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

21

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offered for salehas required the use of safety belts. Even if youare in a vehicle that has airbags, you still haveto buckle up to get the most protection. That istrue not only in frontal collisions, but especiallyin side and other collisions.

22

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 38 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 40. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

23

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 37.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

24

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

25

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

26


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

27


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

28


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

29


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

30

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

31

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 24.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

32

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 37.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

33

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

34

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install thecomfort guide to the shoulder belt:

1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip locatedbetween the interior body and the seatback.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then, placethe guide over the belt and insert the two edgesof the belt into the slots of the guide.

35

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt could

CAUTION: (Continued)


be seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 32. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

36

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can take themout of the guide. Slide the guide back onto itsstorage clip located between the interior bodyand the seatback.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal or side crash or a rollover if thethreshold conditions for pretensioner activationare met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probablyother new parts for your safety belt system. SeeReplacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash onpage 83.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in to orderit, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, just attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

37

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

38

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides onpage 35. If the child is sitting in the center rearseat passenger position, move the child towardthe safety belt buckle. In either case, be surethat the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that beltsprovide.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the beltin this way, in a crash the child might slide



under the belt. The belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neitherthe distance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in theUnited States and in every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must be restrained while ina vehicle.

40

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriate restraints.Young children should not use the vehicle’s adultsafety belts alone, unless there is no otherchoice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.



During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

41

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available.

42

When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

43

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of the infant.The harness system holds the infant in place and,in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in therestraint.

44

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

45

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint systemis a portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to be used ina vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50 formore information. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

46

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,and to this manual. The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing thechild within the child restraint. One system,the three-point harness, has straps thatcome down over each of the infant’sshoulders and buckle together at the crotch.The five-point harness system has two shoulderstraps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap.

A shield may take the place of hip straps. AT-shaped shield has shoulder straps that areattached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

47

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a labelon your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates.



This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

48

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, neverput a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger seat unless the passenger airbagstatus indicator shows off and the airbag is off. Hereis why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,



no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

49

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodatea child restraint with lower attachments (B).

50

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) onthe child restraint connects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have a top tether.Be sure to read and follow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for many childrestraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

51

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors has twolabels, near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

The labels are located above a flap, at the base ofthe seatback, in the rear outside seating positions.The anchors are located under the flap. In order toget to the anchors you will need to pull the strap atthe center of the seat where the seat cushion meetsthe seatback. This will allow you to fold the seatcushion up and out of the way. Lift the flap toexpose the anchors and then lower the seatcushion. Be sure the cushion is locked into place.

Second Row

52

The top tether anchors for each rear seatingposition are located on the floor in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Do not use the rear tie-down bracketsnear the liftgate for top tethers. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position, if a national or locallaw requires that the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 48 for additional information.

53

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

54

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint that thereis no contact between the child restraint or theLATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety beltssecured may cause damage to the safety beltor the seat. When removing the child restraint,always remember to return the safety belts totheir normal, stowed position before folding therear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seatwhere the seat cushion meets theseatback. This will allow you to fold theseat cushion up and out of the way. Liftthe flap to expose the anchors and thenlower the seat cushion. See Rear SeatOperation on page 16 for additionalinformation. Be sure the cushion islocked into place.

1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.

55

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the child restraintto the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if your vehicle has one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions. If your vehicle has acargo shade, route the top tetherbetween the seatback and the cargoshade.

Fold down the headrestraint and route thesingle tether under thehead restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts. SeeRear Seat Operationon page 16.

Fold down the headrestraint and route thedual tether aroundthe head restraint. SeeRear Seat Operationon page 16.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

56

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearOutside Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 50.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in this position. Be sureto follow the instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

57

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.

58

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Rear Seat PositionMany child restraints are too wide to be correctlysecured in the center rear seat, although someof them will fit there. If the center seat position istoo narrow for your child restraint, secure it ina rear outside seat position.

If you secure a child restraint in the center seatposition, follow the instructions in Securing a ChildRestraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position onpage 57.

59

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. Arear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 48.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 74 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 179 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


60



If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat position, move the seat as farback as it will go before securing the forward-facingchild restraint. See Power Seats on page 9.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 50.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 74. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing the child restraint in thisseat. See Power Seats on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay lit whenyou turn the ignition to RUN or START. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 179.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

61

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

62

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator will comeon and stay on when the key is turned toRUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

63

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver andanother frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle also has roof-mounted side impactairbags designed for either side impact or rolloverdeployment. Roof-mounted side impact airbags areavailable for the driver and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver and for the right frontpassenger and the passenger seated directlybehind that passenger.

Even if you have no right front passenger seat inyour vehicle there is still an active frontal airbagin the right side of the instrument panel. Donot place cargo in front of this airbag.

{CAUTION:

Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. Ina crash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 67 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 296.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

64

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many



side crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal or in rear crashes. Therollover capable airbags have beendesigned to deploy the roof-mounted sideimpact airbags in the event of a vehiclerollover.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

65

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted side impactairbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you are too close toan inflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 38 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 40.

66

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 178 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

67

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the person seated directly behind the driveris in the ceiling above the side windows.

68

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger is in the ceiling above theside windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anything betweenan occupant and an airbag, and do notattach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering. And, because your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of your vehicleby routing the rope or tie down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, the pathof an inflating side impact airbag will beblocked. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear.

69

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severefrontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold levelfor the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above orbelow this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

70

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.Your vehicle has seat position sensors whichenables the sensing system to monitor the positionof the driver’s seat and the right front passenger’sseat. Seat position sensors provide informationthat is used to determine if the airbags shoulddeploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.Your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbagsand a rollover sensor. See Airbag System onpage 64. These “rollover capable” airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes or during a rollover. A roof-mounted sideimpact airbag will inflate if the crash severity isabove the system’s designed “threshold level.”The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Roof-mounted side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,or rear impacts. Both roof-mounted side impactairbags will deploy when either side of the vehicleis struck or during a rollover.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving on page 281.

71

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollovercapable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, thesensing system detects that the vehicle is about toroll over. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of the airbag modulesinside the steering wheel and in the instrumentpanel in front of the right front passenger. Forvehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags, theairbag modules, the inflator, and the airbags arelocated in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the sidewindows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderateto severe side collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbagssupplement the protection provided by safety belts.Airbags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many sideimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted rolloverairbags would not help you in many types ofcollisions, including many frontal or near frontalcollisions, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe sidecollisions or rollovers for vehicles with roof-mountedrollover airbags.

72

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize anairbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbags maystill be at least partially inflated minutes after thevehicle comes to rest. Some components of theairbag module — the steering wheel hub for thedriver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s airbag, and the area along theceiling of the vehicle near the side windowsfor vehicles with roof–mounted side impactairbags — may be hot for a short time. The partsof the airbag that come into contact with you maybe warm, but not too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of the windshield or beingable to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andflash the hazard warning flashers when the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors again, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn off the hazard warningflashers by using the controls for those features.

73

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for your airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 473.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. A passengerairbag status indicator in the rearview mirror will bevisible when you turn your ignition key to STARTor RUN.

United States

Canada

74

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the word ONor the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbolfor off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 179.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older childriding in a booster seat.

75

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,a label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the system



detects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


76

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, neverput a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger seat unless the passenger airbagstatus indicator shows off and the airbag is off. Hereis why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

77

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorin the rearview mirror will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 60.If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properly in the rightfront passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag is active.For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is not sitting properly inthe seat.

78

If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask theperson to place the seatback in the fully uprightposition, then sit upright in the seat, centered on theseat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 178 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

79

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers,can affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not usingseat covers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 81 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in severalplaces around your vehicle. You do not want thesystem to inflate while someone is working on yourvehicle. Your dealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing your vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 480.

80

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also, theairbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 466.

81

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, the inside review mirror,ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbagwiring can affect the operation of the airbagsystem. If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 466.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safety beltsystem parts. If you see anything that might keepa safety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Careof Safety Belts on page 427 for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. Ifa belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

82

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe side impact airbag covering on the ceilingnear the side windows, the airbag may not workproperly. You may have to replace the airbagmodule in the steering wheel, both the airbagmodule and the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbagmodule and ceiling covering for roof-mountedrollover airbags. Do not open or break theairbag coverings.

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash, thenyou need new parts.

83

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will needto have LATCH system, safety belt or seatparts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairsmay be necessary even if the belt or LATCHsystem was not being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 178.

84

Keys .............................................................. 87Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 90Doors and Locks .......................................... 92

Door Locks ................................................. 92Power Door Locks ....................................... 93Delayed Locking .......................................... 94Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 94Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 97Lockout Protection ....................................... 97Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 98

Windows ....................................................... 99Power Windows ........................................ 100Sun Visors ................................................ 101

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 101Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 102PASS-Key® III ........................................... 103PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 104

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 106New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 106Ignition Positions ....................................... 107Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 108Starting the Engine .................................... 108Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 110Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 110Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 112Parking Brake ........................................... 116Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 117Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 118Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 118Engine Exhaust ......................................... 119Running the Engine While Parked ............. 120

Mirrors ......................................................... 121Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 121Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with Compass ........................................ 123Outside Power Mirror ................................ 123

Section 2 Features and Controls

85

Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 124Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 124Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 124

OnStar® System .......................................... 125Universal Home Remote System ................ 128

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 128

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 129

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 130

Universal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 135

Storage Areas ............................................. 139Glove Box ................................................. 139Cupholder(s) .............................................. 139Overhead Console ..................................... 140Center Console Storage Area .................... 140Luggage Carrier ........................................ 141Rear Floor Storage Lid .............................. 142Cargo Cover ............................................. 142Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 143

Moonroof ..................................................... 144

Section 2 Features and Controls

86

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

87

This vehicle hasdouble-sided keys thatcan be used for theignition and door lock.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerprovides the owner with a pair of identical keysand a key code number.

The key code number tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keepthis number in a safe place. If you lose yourkeys, you will be able to have new ones madeeasily using this number. Your selling dealershould also have this number.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, callthe Roadside Assistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 469.

The key cannot be removed from the ignition ifyour vehicle does not have power. See IgnitionPositions on page 107 for additional information.

88

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 90.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

89

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationWith this system you can lock and unlock yourdoors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)away using the remote keyless entry transmittersupplied with your vehicle. The remote keylessentry transmitter buttons will not operate when thekey is in the ignition.

K (Unlock): Press theunlock button toautomatically unlock thedriver’s door. Theparking lamps may flashand the interior lightswill go on. Pressthe unlock button againand all remainingdoors will unlock.

You can program different feedback settingsthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).For more information see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 194

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. Press the lock button again withinthree seconds and the horn may chirp.

L (Panic Alarm): Press the horn symbol tomake the horn sound. The headlamps andtaillamps will also flash for up to 30 seconds. Thiscan be turned off by pressing the horn buttonagain, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by startingthe vehicle.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourdealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Eachvehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

90

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last abouttwo years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display aKEY FOB # BATTERY LOW message whenthe transmitter battery is low. See “KEY FOB #BATTERY LOW” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 199

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Remove the screw from the back of theremote keyless entry cover and gently pry thetransmitter apart.

2. Remove and replace the battery with athree-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.

3. Assemble the transmitter and replace thescrew.

4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

91

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

92

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle. From the outside, use the remote keylessentry transmitter or the key.

From the inside, slidethe manual leverforward or rearward.

The manual lever on each door works only thatdoor’s lock.

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are locatedon the driver’s andfront passenger’sdoor armrests.

Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors.To unlock the doors, press the other side ofthe switch.

93

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of the doors andthe liftgate when using the power lock or theremote keyless entry system.

The first press of the power door lock switch orlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitterwith the driver’s door open will activate thedelay locking. A chime will sound. All doors andthe liftgate can be reopened for up to five secondsfrom the time the last door is closed.

Five seconds after the last door is closed, all thedoors will lock. You can lock the doorsimmediately by using the power door lock switchor by pressing the lock button on the optionalremote keyless entry transmitter a second time.

If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature willnot lock the doors. See Lockout Protection onpage 97.

You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off.If the feature is turned off, the doors will lockimmediately when a power door lock switch orremote keyless entry transmitter lock buttonis pressed.

Programming Delayed LockingTo turn the delayed locking feature on or off, dothe following:

1. Press and hold the power door lock switch onthe driver’s door in the lock position.

2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button twice.

If the delayed locking feature was on, it will nowbe off. If the feature was off, it will now be on.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is equipped with an automaticlock/unlock feature which enables you to programyour vehicle’s power door locks. You canprogram this feature through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), or by the following method. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 205.

94

Programmable Locking FeatureFollowing are the two locking modes that can beprogrammed:

Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission isshifted out of PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed isgreater than 8 mph (13 km/h).

The automatic door locks were pre-programmed atthe factory to lock all the doors when thetransmission is shifted into gear. The followinginstructions detail how to program your doorlocks differently than the factory setting. Chooseone of the two programming options listedpreviously before entering the program mode.

To enter the program mode, do the following:

1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then,with the key in LOCK, release the turnsignal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,you will hear the lock switch lock andunlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a30-second program timer will begin.

3. You are now ready to program the automaticdoor locks. Select one of the two programmingoptions listed previously, and press the lockside of the power door lock switch tocycle through the lock options. You will have30 seconds to begin programming. If youexceed the 30-second limit, the lockswill automatically lock and unlock and thehorn will chirp twice to indicate that you haveleft the program mode. If this occurs,repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 tore-enter the programming mode.

You can exit the program mode any time byturning the ignition to RUN. The locks willautomatically lock and unlock and the horn willchirp twice to indicate that you are leavingthe program mode. If the lock/unlock switches arenot pressed while in the programming mode,the current auto lock/unlock setting will notbe modified.

See your dealer for more information.

95

Programmable Unlocking FeatureThe following is the list of available programmingoptions:

Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when thetransmission is shifted into PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmissionis shifted into PARK (P).

Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key isremoved from the ignition.

Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.

The automatic door locks were pre-programmed atthe factory to unlock all doors once thetransmission is shifted to PARK (P). The followinginstructions detail how to program your doorlocks differently than the factory setting. Chooseone of the four programming options listedpreviously before entering the program mode.

To enter the program mode you need to do thefollowing:

1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then,with the key in LOCK, release the turnsignal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,you will hear the lock switch lock andunlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a30-second program timer will begin.

3. You are now ready to program the automaticdoor locks. Select one of the four programmingoptions listed above, and press the unlock sideof the power door lock switch to cycle throughthe unlocking options. You will have30 seconds to begin programming. If youexceed the 30-second limit, the locks willautomatically lock and unlock and the horn willchirp twice to indicate that you have left theprogram mode. If this occurs, repeat theprocedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter theprogramming mode.

You can exit the program mode any time by turningthe ignition to RUN. The locks will automaticallylock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice toindicate that you are leaving the program mode.If the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while inthe programming mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.

See your dealer for more information.

96

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle may have this feature. You can lockthe rear doors so they cannot be opened fromthe inside by passengers. To use one ofthese locks do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find asecurity lock lever located on the insideedge of each rear door.

2. Move the leverdown to engagethe securitylock. Move the leverup to disengagethe security lock.

3. Close the door.

The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside while this feature is in use. Ifyou want to open the rear door while the securitylock is on, unlock the door and open the doorfrom the outside.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature stops the power door locks fromlocking when the key is in the ignition and a dooris open to protect you from locking your key inthe vehicle.

If the power lock switch is pressed when a door isopen and the key is in the ignition, all the doorswill lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.

97

Liftgate/Liftglass

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate or liftglass open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness and evendeath. If you must drive with the liftgateopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate orliftglass:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your climate control

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See“Climate Control System” in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 119.

Liftgate ReleaseTo unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 90. The liftglass will also unlockwhen the liftgate is unlocked.

Press the button on the liftglass to open it.To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle locatedin the center of the liftgate. When the liftgateis opened, the liftglass will lock after a short delay.

Emergency Release for OpeningLiftgate1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of

the liftgate in the center, to expose the accesshole in the trim panel.

2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole inthe trim panel.

3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlockposition. Pry the right release lever up tounlatch the liftgate.

4. Reinstall the trim plug.

98

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

99

Power Windows

The controls for the power windows are located onthe armrest on each of the side doors. With powerwindows, the switches operate the windows whenthe ignition is in RUN, ACC or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 108. The driver’sdoor also has a switch for each of the passenger’swindows.

Press down the top of the switch to lower thewindow and pull up on the switch to raisethe window. If you hold the switch down forthree to seven seconds after the window has beencompletely lowered or raised, the window willnot operate for about 15 seconds.

Express-Down Window

AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and frontpassenger’s window switches have anexpress-down feature that allows you to lower thewindow without holding the switch down. Pressdown briefly on the driver’s or front passenger’swindow switch labeled AUTO to activate theexpress-down feature. Lightly tap the switch toopen the window slightly. The express-downfeature can be interrupted at any time by pressingthe top of the switch.

100

Window Lockout

o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockoutfeature to prevent passengers from operatingthe power windows. The lockout switch is locatedin front of the window switches on the driver’sdoor. A light in the lockout switch will come on toshow that the switch has been activated. Pressthe lockout switch again to return to normaloperation.

Sun Visors

Sun Visors with Slide RodYour vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sunvisor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor fromthe center mount and slide it along the rod fromside-to-side to cover the driver or passenger side ofthe front window. Swing the sun visor to the side tocover the side window. It can also be moved alongthe rod from side-to-side in this position.

Sun Visors with Fixed Rod andPull-out ExtensionYour vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sunvisor down to block glare. Pull the sun visorextender out for additional coverage. Detach thesun visor from the center mount and swing it to theside to cover the side window.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorPull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover toturn on the lamps. The lamps will turn off whenthe cover is closed.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

101

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle is equippedwith a contenttheft-deterrent alarmsystem.

Here is how to operate the system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switchor the remote keyless entry transmitter. Thesecurity light should flash.

3. Close all doors. The security light should turnoff after approximately 30 seconds. The alarmis not armed until the security light turns off.

If a locked door is opened without the key or theremote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will gooff. The headlamps and parking lamps will flashfor two minutes, and the horn will sound for30 seconds, then will turn off to save thebattery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will notactivate if you lock the doors with a key or use themanual door lock. It activates only if you use apower door lock switch with the door open, or withthe remote keyless entry transmitter. You shouldalso remember that you can start your vehicle withthe correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• If you do not want to activate thetheft-deterrent system, the vehicle should belocked with the door key after the doorsare closed.

• Always unlock a door with a key, or use theremote keyless entry transmitter. Unlockinga door any other way will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock anydoor with the key. You can also turn off the alarmby pressing unlock on the remote keyless entrytransmitter. The alarm will not stop if you tryto unlock a door any other way.

102

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’swindow and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors withthe power door lock switch while the door isopen, or with the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and waitfor the security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock thedoor with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

When the alarm is set the power door unlockswitch is not operational.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 435.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps donot flash, the vehicle should be serviced byyour dealer.

PASS-Key® IIIYour PASS-Key® III system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponderin the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

103

PASS-Key® III Operation

Your vehicle is equippedwith the PASS-Key® III(PersonalizedAutomotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® IIIis a passivetheft-deterrent system.

This means you do not have to do anything differentto arm or disarm the system. It works when youinsert or remove the key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it shuts down thevehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter willnot work and fuel will stop being delivered to theengine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method tostart the vehicle will be discouraged because of thehigh number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine doesnot start and the SECURITY light comes on, thekey may have a damaged transponder. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 435. If theengine still does not start with the other key, yourvehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

104

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder tolearn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. This procedureis for programming additional keys only.

Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage yourkeys, only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® IIIto have new keys made. To program additionalkeys you will require two current driver’s keys. Youmust add a step to the following procedure.After Step 2 repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the secondcurrent driver’s key. Then continue with Step 3.

To program the new key, do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.

2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignitionand start the engine. If the engine will notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it toON within 10 seconds of removing theprevious key.

5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed. It may not be apparentthat the SECURITY light went on due tohow quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the SECURITY lightcomes on and stays on, you will be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® IIIsystem, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the PASS-Key® III system at this time.

If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, seeyour dealer to have a new key made.

105

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)

or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new linings canmean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 305 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

106

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turnthe ignition switch tofour different positions.The ignition switchis located on thecenter console.

9 (LOCK): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You willonly be able to remove the key when the ignitionis turned to LOCK and the vehicle has power.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

ACC (Accessory): This position lets you usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off.

Lengthy operation of features such as the radio inthe accessory ignition position may drain thebattery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Donot operate your vehicle in the accessoryignition position for a long period of time.

R (RUN): This is the position for driving.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.

107

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow certainfeatures of your vehicle to continue to work up to10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.

Your radio, power windows, DVD player, sunroof(option) and overhead console will work whenthe ignition key is in RUN or ACC. Once the key isturned from RUN to LOCK, these features willcontinue to work for up to 10 minutes or untila door is opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

108

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

109

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can change theposition of the throttle and brake pedals. Thisfeature is designed for shorter drivers, since thepedals cannot move farther away from the standardposition, but can move closer for better pedal reach.If your vehicle has this feature, it can beprogrammed to work with the memory function. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 11.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this featureto operate.

The switch usedto adjust the pedalsis located on thesteering column.

Press the switch forward or backward to move thepedals closer or farther away from you.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

110

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment next to thebattery box facing the engine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

111

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several different positions for your gearshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you start theengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 117.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 305.

112

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control system. You have tofully apply the regular brakes first and then pressthe shift lever button before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button and move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) onpage 118.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 295.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

113

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 280.

DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or foroff-road driving. You may want to shift thetransmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lowergear selection if the transmission shifts too often.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You mightchoose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting between gearsand when going down a steep hill.

To shift to the THIRD (3) position, you must firstpress the large button on the shift handle.While the button is pressed, move the shifter inthe THIRD (3) position.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

114

To shift to the SECOND (2) position, you must firstpress the large button on the shift handle. Whilethe button is pressed, move the shifter in theSECOND (2) position.

You can also use SECOND (2) for starting thevehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

To shift to the FIRST (1) position, you must firstpress the large button on the shift handle.While the button is pressed, move the shifter inthe FIRST (1) position.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. The repair will not be covered byyour warranty. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

115

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your foot and pull up on theparking brake lever located between the seats.If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lighton the instrument panel cluster will come on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 183.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down.

Pull the parking brake lever up until you can pressin the button at the end of the lever. Hold thebutton in as you move the parking brake lever allthe way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and you must park on ahill, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.

116

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot andset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressingthe button on the shift lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the key, yourvehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pressing the button on the console shiftlever. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

117

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult topull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properlybefore you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how,see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 117.When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system. You have to fully applythe regular brakes first and then press the shiftlever button before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 112.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

118

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

119

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 119.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 291.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 117.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 305.

120

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and the OnStar®

system.

There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®

system. See your dealer for more informationon the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.See OnStar® System on page 125 for moreinformation about the services OnStar® provides.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the indicator light, located to theleft of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, pressand hold the on/off button until the lightcomes on, indicating that the mirror is inautomatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button untilthe indicator light turns off.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

There is a compass display in the window in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassdisplays a maximum of two characters. Forexample, “NE” is displayed for north-east.

121

Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button to activate thecompass calibration mode. CAL will be displayedin the compass window on the mirror.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.The mirror is set to zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, your compass could givefalse readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button forsix seconds. Release the button when(FOR ZONE) is displayed. The number shownis the current zone number.

3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear inthe window on the mirror by pressing the on/offbutton. Once you find your zone number,release the button. After about four seconds,the mirror will return to the compass display,and the new zone number will be set.

122

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for theautomatic dimming feature and compass.See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror withOnStar® and Compass on page 121 for informationon mirror operation.

Outside Power MirrorThe outside powermirror control is locatedon the driver’s door.

1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desireto adjust.

2. Move the control in the direction you wantthe mirror to go.

3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions so thatyou can see the side of your vehicle and thearea behind your vehicle.

4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the controlto the center position so the mirror cannotbe moved.

If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel positionin any direction, the mirror will enter a ratchetingmode. This action is harmless. It is a warning thatthe mirror can go no further. To stop this action,back the mirror up by moving the control inthe opposite direction.

Fold the mirror in manually before entering a carwash. To do this, pull the mirror in toward thevehicle. Push the mirror back out when finished.

123

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorThe passenger’s outside mirror will adjustto a preset tilt position while the vehicle is inREVERSE (R) gear. Curb view assist maybe useful when you are parallel parking. Themirror will return to normal position whenthe vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear.Automatic mirror movement in either directionwill follow a short delay.

You can turn this feature on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 205.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right or left lane, you could hit avehicle. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s outside mirror is convex.A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more canbe seen from the driver’s seat.

Outside Heated MirrorsWhen you operate the rear window defogger, adefogger also warms the heated driver’s andpassenger’s outside rearview mirrors to help clearthem of ice, snow and condensation.

124

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and

Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond the firstyear, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections®

Plan. For more information, press the OnStar®

button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar®

services (such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

125

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• Remote Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with 30complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

126

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 259 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we can provideyou with location-based services.OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

127

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.

128




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


129

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below.If there is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

130

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

131

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

Example of Switch Settings Example

132

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like to useto control the garage door until the garage doormoves. The indicator light above the selectedbutton should slowly blink. You may need tohold the button from five to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

133

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owner’s guide for your garage door opener.

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

134

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for about 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly above thebuttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 468.

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have thestop and reverse feature. This includes any garagedoor opener model manufactured before April 1,1982. If you have a newer garage door openerwith rolling codes, please be sure to followSteps 6 through 8 to complete the programming ofyour Universal Home Remote Transmitter.

135

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 468.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery beinstalled in your hand-held transmitter forquicker and more accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

136

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds,then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

137

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

138

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 468.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling the handle to theleft. Use the key to lock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)

Your vehicle has acupholder on theinstrument panel next tothe radio.

To open the cupholder, push once on the supportand the cupholder will move into position foruse. To close the cupholder, lift the support uptowards the instrument panel.

A cupholder is located on the front of the centerconsole and two more are located at the rearof the center console. To use the rear cupholders,pull down on the lid.

139

Overhead ConsoleYour vehicle may have this feature. The overheadconsole may include reading lamps, a UniversalHome Remote, and a moonroof switch. Seethe following for more information:

• Reading Lamps on page 164.

• Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) on page 128 orUniversal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) on page 129.

• Moonroof on page 144.

Center Console Storage AreaGrasp the front lever on the center console whilelifting the top to open it.

The console may contain one or more of thefollowing components:

• Rear Seat Audio Controls. See Rear SeatAudio (RSA) on page 257 for moreinformation.

• Rear Climate Control. See Rear ClimateControl System on page 173 for moreinformation.

• Accessory Power Outlets. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 166 for moreinformation.

• Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 107.

If your vehicle has the center armrestcompartment, lift the cover by pulling up on thelatch handle located underneath the front edge ofthe armrest.

140

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a luggagecarrier that allows you to load things on top of yourvehicle. The luggage carrier, if equipped, hasside rails attached to the roof, and places to use

for tying things down. These let you load someother things on top of your vehicle, as long as theyare not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.

Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo so thatit rests on the slats as far forward aspossible and against the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 296.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check now and then to make surethe luggage carrier is locked and cargo is stillsecurely fastened.

When the luggage carrier is not in use, place thecrossrails at the following positions for reducedwind noise. Place one crossrail at the rearmost point of the vehicle and the other crossrailabove the opening of the rear door.

141

Rear Floor Storage Lid

{CAUTION:

If any removable convenience item is notsecured properly, it can move around in acollision or sudden stop. People in thevehicle could be injured. Be sure tosecure any such item properly.

Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with aremovable storage lid.

To remove the rear floor storage lid, do thefollowing:

1. Press the latch release and lift up the latchhandle.

2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.

3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from theforward mounting slots.

To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse theprevious steps. Make sure the lid is secure byapplying slight pressure to the latch until you hearit click.

Cargo CoverThe cargo cover can be used to cover items in thecargo area of your vehicle.

To install the cargo cover, do the following:

1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trimpanel located behind the rear seat.

2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with thepocket located on the opposite side of the trimpanel and release.

3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latchthe posts into the sockets on the inside of thevehicle to secure it.

142

To remove the cargo cover, do the following:

1. Release the cover from the latch posts andcarefully roll it back up.

2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from thepocket in the trim panel.

3. Remove the cargo cover from the otherendcap so that you can remove the shadefrom the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could bethrown about the vehicle during a collisionor sudden maneuver. You or others couldbe injured. If you remove the cover, alwaysstore it in the proper storage location.When you put it back, always be sure that itis securely reattached.

Cargo Tie Downs

There may be cargotie downs in the rearof your vehicle thatallow you to strapcargo in and keep itfrom moving.

143

MoonroofThe vehicle may be equipped with a power slidingmoonroof. The ignition must be turned to RUN,ACC, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)must be active to operate it. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 108.

The moonroof switchis located in theoverhead console.

Press and release the back of the button to openthe moonroof. Press and hold the front of thebutton to close the moonroof.

With the moonroof closed, press the front of thebutton to open the moonroof to the vent position.

The moonroof has a sunshade which can bepulled forward to block sun rays. If the sunshadeis in the closed position, it will open when themoonroof is opened.

144

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 148Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................. 150Horn .......................................................... 150Tilt Wheel .................................................. 151Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 151Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 152Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 153Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 153Windshield Wipers ..................................... 154Windshield Washer .................................... 155Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 155Headlamp Washer ..................................... 156Cruise Control ........................................... 156Headlamps ................................................ 160Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 160Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 161Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 161Fog Lamps ................................................ 162Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 163Dome Lamps ............................................. 163Dome Lamp Override ................................ 163Entry Lighting ............................................ 164Exit Lighting .............................................. 164Reading Lamps ......................................... 164

Electric Power Management ...................... 164Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 165Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 166

Climate Controls ......................................... 167Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 167Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 172Rear Climate Control System .................... 173Climate Controls Personalization ................ 173

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 174Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 175Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 176Trip Odometer ........................................... 176Tachometer ............................................... 176Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 177Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 177Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 178Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 179Charging System Light .............................. 182Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 182Brake System Warning Light ..................... 183Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 184StabiliTrak® Service Light ........................... 185StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 185Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 186

Section 3 Instrument Panel

145

Tire Pressure Light .................................... 186Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 187Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 190Security Light ............................................ 191Cruise Control Light .................................. 191Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 191Highbeam On Light ................................... 192Service All-Wheel Drive Light .................... 192Check Gages Warning Light ...................... 192Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 193Fuel Gage ................................................. 193Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 194Check Gas Cap Light ................................ 194

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 194DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 195DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 199DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 205

Audio System(s) ......................................... 212Setting the Time ........................................ 213Radio with CD ........................................... 214Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 222Using an MP3 ........................................... 233XM Radio Messages ................................. 239Navigation/Radio System ........................... 243Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 243Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 257Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 258Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 259Radio Reception ........................................ 260Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 261Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 261Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 261XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 261

Section 3 Instrument Panel

146

✍ NOTES

147

Instrument Panel Overview

148

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 172.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 259.D. Horn. See Horn on page 150.E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 175.F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See

Windshield Wipers on page 154.G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button and Driver

Information Center Buttons. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 150 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 194.

H. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See WindshieldWasher on page 155.

I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 163.

J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 329.K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp

Override on page 163.L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 212.M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate

Control System on page 167.N. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission

Operation on page 112.O. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on

page 107.P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on

page 116.Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power

Outlet(s) on page 166.R. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 139.S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 139.

149

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbols on thesteering wheel pad.

150

Tilt WheelThe steering wheel should be adjusted beforeyou drive.

The tilt lever is locatedto the left of the steeringcolumn, under theturn signal lever.

It can be raised to the highest level to giveyour legs more room when you enter and exitthe vehicle.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you. Move the steering wheelto a comfortable level, then release the leverto lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 152.

• O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 160.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 153.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 153.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 162.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 156.

151

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionslet you signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the leverreturns automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster flashes in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever returnsby itself when released. The bottom of the outsiderearview mirrors might also have lane changeindicators.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb could be burned out and other drivers will notsee your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 435 and check forburned-out bulbs.

If you have a trailer towing option with addedwiring for the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher isused. With this flasher installed, the signalindicator flashes even if a turn signal bulb isburned out. Check the front and rear turn signallamps regularly to make sure they are working.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of amile (1.2 km), a chime sounds at each flash ofthe turn signal. To turn off the chime, movethe turn signal lever to the off position.

152

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low to highbeam, push the lever toward the instrument panel.To return to low-beam headlamps, pull themultifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicator lighton the instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass. It works even if your headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it.

If the headlamps are in the automatic position oron low beam, the high-beam headlamps turnon. They will stay on as long as you hold the levertoward you. The high-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster comes on. Release thelever to return to normal operation.

153

Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers.

7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it fora single wiping cycle. The lever will return to itsoriginal position. For more cycles, hold thelever down before releasing it.

9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn offthe wipers.

& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set adelay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustmentband to set the length of the delay.

x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set thelength of the delay between wipes when using thedelay feature. The closer you move the bandtoward mist, the longer the delay. The windshieldwiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.

6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor slow, steady wiping cycles.

1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor rapid wiping cycles.

If the windshield wipers are in use for aboutsix seconds while you are driving, the exteriorlamps will come on automatically if the exteriorlamp control is in AUTO.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades orblade inserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 377.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

154

Windshield Washer

L (Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluidon the windshield, press the windshield washerpaddle. The wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or return to your preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

This control is located tothe left of the steeringwheel on the instrumentpanel.

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control toeither 1, 2, or 3. For delayed wiping, turn thecontrol to 1 or 2. For steady wiping, turn the controlto 3. To turn the wiper off, turn the control to 0.

To wash the rear window, press the washersymbol located in the center of the control.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottleas the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash your windshieldbut not your rear window, check the fluid level.

155

Headlamp WasherYour vehicle may be equipped with a headlampwasher system. The headlamp washers cleardebris from the headlamp lenses by soaking thelens with fluid, waiting for about five seconds, thenrinsing the loose debris from the lenses.

The headlamp washers are located under theheadlamps. The headlamp washers activate forone wash-wait-rinse cycle when the frontwindshield washer button is pressed for the firsttime after your vehicle is turned on. The headlampswashers then activate automatically for one cycleafter every four front windshield washes.

The headlamps must be on to be washed. If theheadlamps are off, only the front windshield will bewashed. See Windshield Washer on page 155for more information.

Cruise Control

9 (Off): This positionturns the system off.

R (On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to thissymbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resumeto a previously set speed.

T (Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

156

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control willshut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.2. Get up to the speed you want.3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever

and release it.4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Some vehicles have acruise light on theinstrument panel clusterthat will come onwhen the cruise controlis engaged.

157

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. But you donot need to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release theswitch or apply the brake. So unless you wantto go faster, do not hold the switch atresume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed. If the accelerator pedal isheld longer than 60 seconds, cruise controlwill turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thespeed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press in the button at the end of the lever until

you reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

158

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you maywant to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you mayhave to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the braketakes you out of cruise control. Many drivers findthis to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo turn off the cruise control, do one of thefollowing:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal,

• move the cruise control switch to off, or

• shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

• If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature,cruise control will turn off if road conditionscause StabiliTrak® to activate.

• If the accelerator pedal is held longer than60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.

The cruise control will turn off automatically if thetraction control system or StabiliTrak® systemactivate, if your vehicle is equipped with eitherfeature.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

159

HeadlampsThe exterior lamp control is located in the middleof the turn signal/multifunction lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingfour positions:

O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position toturn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)and Automatic Headlamps. Turning the control tothis position again turns the automatic lightingsystem back on. This feature is not available forvehicles first sold in Canada.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to put the headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps onand off depending upon how much light isavailable outside of the vehicle.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Headlamps on ReminderA reminder tone sounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned on, if thedriver’s door is open and the ignition is in LOCKor ACC. To turn the tone off, turn the knob allthe way counterclockwise.

In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn offonce the ignition key is in LOCK.

160

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL will activate when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps knob is in automaticheadlamp mode.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The transmission is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, either your turn signal lamps orheadlamps will be on. If your vehicle is equippedwith the High Intensity Discharge (HID) lightingsystem option, the DRL system will turn on yourturn signal lamps. If your vehicle is not equippedwith HID, the DRL system will turn on your

headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Theinstrument panel won’t be lit up either.When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regularheadlamps.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the AutomaticHeadlamp System turns on the headlamps whenthe vehicle is started and after the transaxlehas been shifted out of the PARK (P) position.The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and parkinglamps will come on. The instrument panel lightsand radio lights will also turn on at normalbrightness. Once on, the system remains onduring these conditions even if the vehicleis shifted back into PARK (P).The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not coveredor the system may come on whenever theignition is on and the vehicle is shifted out of thePARK (P) position.The system could also turn on the lamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather or a tunnel. This is normal.

161

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlampsystems, so that driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does not affect the system.The DRL and automatic headlamp system are onlyaffected when the light sensor sees a change inlighting lasting longer than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system comes on after thetransmission is shifted out of PARK (P). Once youleave the garage, it will take about one minutefor the automatic headlamp system to change toDRL if it is light outside. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster might not be as bright asusual. Make sure the instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position.

If the vehicle is running and the automaticheadlamp system is already on, it can be turnedoff by turning and releasing the headlampcontrol at the off position. The automatic headlampsystem stays off until you turn and release theheadlamp control at the off position again.See Headlamps on page 160.

Fog LampsThe fog lamp control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

-: The band with this symbol is used to turn thefog lamps on and off.When the fog lamps are turned on, the parkinglamps also turn on. A message will also display onthe DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off.See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 194.• To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog

lamp band on the lever up to the dot andrelease it. The band will return to its originalposition.

• If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, thefog lamps will turn off. They will turn back onagain when you switch back to low-beamheadlamps.

When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, amessage will appear on the Driver InformationCenter. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 199.Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

162

Instrument Panel Brightness

Turn the knob to adjustthe instrument panellights. Turn theknob clockwise orcounterclockwise tobrighten or dimthe interior lamps.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps will automatically come on whenyou open a door, unless the dome lamp overridebutton is pressed in.

You can also turn on the dome lamps by turning theinstrument panel brightness control all the wayclockwise to the detent position. In this position, thedome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome overridebutton is located to theleft of the steeringcolumn on theinstrument panel.

To turn the dome lamps off, press the button.The dome lamps will remain off when a door isopen. This will override the illuminated entryfeature unless you use your remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock the vehicle.

To return the lamps to automatic operation, pressthe button again. The dome lamps will comeon when you open any door.

163

Entry LightingThe vehicle has entry lighting.

When any door is opened, the dome lamps comeon as long as the dome override lamp overridebutton is not pressed in. When all the doorsare closed, the lamps stay on for a short period oftime and then turn off automatically. If you usethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterto unlock the vehicle, the interior lamps come onfor a short time whether or not the dome lampoverride is on.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onwhen you remove the key from the ignition. Ifthe dome override is off, these lights will stay onfor a short period of time and then will go out.

Reading LampsPress the indented part of the lenses on thereading lamps located in the overhead console toturn them on or off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

164

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, andvanity lamps if they are left on for more than20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keepthe battery from running down.

If the battery run-down protection shuts off theinterior lamps, it may be necessary to do one ofthe following to return to normal operation:

• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.

• Turn the ignition key to RUN.

This feature will also turn off the parking lampsand headlamps under most circumstances, if theyare left on. If you would like to turn them backon, turn the exterior lamps knob.

165

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With the accessory power outlets, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets.There are two outlets located below the climatecontrols and one outlet is on the rear of the centerfloor console.

Remove the cover from the outlet to use theoutlet. Be sure to put the cover back on when notusing the accessory power outlet.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on the accessorypower outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

166

Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem

With this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. When yourvehicle is first started and the climate controlsystem is on, or if the climate control system hasbeen turned on, the display will show thedriver’s temperature setting for five seconds.Then it will show the outside temperature.

9 (Off): Press this button to turn off the entireclimate control system. Outside air will stillenter the vehicle, and will be directed to the floor.Press the AUTO button, the mode button, thefan arrows, or either temperature knob to turn thesystem on.

C (Mode): Press this button to manually selectthe air delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel,or windshield outlets. The system will stay in theselected mode until the mode button is pressedagain or the AUTO button is pressed.

Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knobclockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lowerthe temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.The display will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing and an arrow pointingtoward the driver. This knob can also adjustthe passenger’s side temperature setting if thetwo are linked.

167

Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn thisknob clockwise or counterclockwise to manuallyraise or lower the temperature on the passenger’sside of the vehicle. The display will show thetemperature setting decreasing or increasing andan arrow pointing toward the passenger. Thepassenger’s temperature setting can be setto match and link to the driver’s temperaturesetting by pressing and holding the AUTO buttonfor three seconds. When adjusting the driver’sside temperature setting, the passenger’sside temperature setting will follow and botharrows will appear on the display. The passenger’sside temperature setting also resets and relinksto the driver’s side temperature setting if thevehicle has been off for more than three hours.

Outside Air Temperature DisplayA new outside temperature reading will bedisplayed if the vehicle has been off for more thanthree hours. If the vehicle has been off for lessthan three hours, the old temperature reading maybe displayed because underhood heat isaffecting the true outside temperature. Underhoodheat can also affect the outside temperaturewhile the engine is running. It may also takeseveral minutes of driving before the displayupdates to the actual outside temperature.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operationis active, the system will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery mode, and thefan speed.

168

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air outlet mode will beautomatically controlled. The air conditioningcompressor will run continuously whenthe outside temperature is over approximately40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally beset to outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inletwill automatically switch to recirculate insideair to help quickly cool down your vehicle.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F(22°C) temperature setting and allow about20 minutes for the system to adjust. Turn thedriver’s or passenger’s side temperatureknob to adjust the temperature setting asnecessary. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 60°F (15°C), the system will remainat the maximum cooling setting. If youchoose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),the system will remain at the maximum heatsetting. Choosing either maximum setting maynot cause the vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Manual OperationTo change the current setting, select one of thefollowing:

w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manuallyadjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow toincrease fan speed and the down arrow todecrease fan speed. The display will change toshow you the selected fan speed and the driver’sside temperature setting for five seconds.

C (Mode): Press this button to manually changethe direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keeppressing the button until the desired mode appearson the display. The display will change to showyou the selected air delivery mode and the driver’stemperature setting for five seconds.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets, thendirects the remaining air to the floor outlets. A littleair is directed toward the windshield and the sidewindow outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upperoutlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

169

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets. Some air also comes out of thedefroster and side window outlets. The recirculationbutton cannot be selected in floor mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turnrecirculation mode on or off. When this button ispressed, an indicator light in the button willalso come on to let you know that it is activated.Recirculation mode is used to recirculate theair inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to helpprevent outside odors and/or dust from enteringyour vehicle or to help cool the air inside ofyour vehicle more quickly. Recirculation mode canbe used with vent and bi-level modes, but itcannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.Defog and defrost modes are described later inthis section.

If recirculation mode is selected with floor,defog, or defrost modes, the indicator will flashthree times and then turn off indicating theselection is not available.

You may also notice that the air conditioningcompressor will run while in recirculation mode.This is normal and will help to prevent fogging.

If the weather is cold and damp, the system maycause the windows to fog while using recirculationmode. If the windows do start to fog, selectdefog or defrost mode and increase fan speed.

Recirculation mode, if selected, will be clearedwhen the engine is turned off.

#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button tomanually turn the air conditioning system on or off.When the system is on, the system willautomatically begin to cool and dehumidify the airinside of your vehicle. The air conditioningsymbol will appear on the display when the airconditioning is on and will turn off when theair conditioning is off.

170

If you turn the air conditioning off while in frontdefrost or defog mode, the air conditioning symbolwill turn off, however, the A/C compressor willremain on to help de-humidify the air insidethe vehicle. If one of the other modes is selectedthe compressor will then turn the A/C off untilit is selected again or the AUTO button is pressed.

To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy andhumid days at a temperature above freezing, pressthe air conditioning button to run the A/Ccompressor. Also it is best to avoid the use of therecirculation mode except when maximum airconditioning performance is needed or for shorttimes to avoid exterior odors.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air-conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofmoisture condensing on the cool window glass.This can be reduced if the climate control systemis used properly. You can use either defog orfront defrost to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield.

- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windowsof fog or moisture. This setting will deliver airto the floor and windshield outlets.

0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost buttonto clear the windshield and side windows offrost or fog quickly. The system will automaticallycontrol the fan speed if you select defrost fromAUTO mode. If the outside temperature is40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air conditioningcompressor will automatically run to helpdehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

171

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off.

An indicator light in the button will come on to letyou know that the rear window defogger isactivated.

The rear window defogger will turn offapproximately 10 minutes after the button ispressed. If you need additional warming time,press the button again.

The heated mirrors will also come on when youpress this button. See Outside Heated Mirrors onpage 124.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and on thesides of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,

snow, or any other obstruction, such asleaves. The heater and defroster will work farbetter, reducing the chance of fogging theinside of your windows.

• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather,select maximum blower speed for a fewmoments before driving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging the inside ofyour window.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, mayaffect the performance of the heating and airconditioning system. Check with yourdealer before adding equipment to the outsideof your vehicle.

172

Rear Climate Control SystemThe lower buttons on the rear seat audio are usedto adjust the rear seat climate controls. Thetemperature of the air coming through the rearoutlets is determined by the front passenger’stemperature setting.

z9y (Fan) Press this button to adjust thefan speed.

z\y (Mode) Press this button to change thedirection of airflow in the rear seat area toeither vent, bi-level or floor mode.

P (On/Off) Press this button to turn the rearclimate controls on or off.

The rear control will only turn on if the front is onand not in defrost mode.

Climate Controls PersonalizationYour vehicle is equipped with a Driver InformationCenter (DIC). You can store and recall theclimate control settings for temperature, air deliverymode and fan speed for two different drivers.The personal choice settings recalled aredetermined by the transmitter used to enter thevehicle. After the button with the unlock symbol ona remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed,the climate control will adjust to the last settings ofthe identified driver. The settings can also bechanged by pressing one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.When adjustments are made, the new settingsare automatically saved for the driver.

173

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC)that works along with the warning lights andgages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 194.

174

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things youwill need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

175

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Press the trip stem located onthe instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,the new one will be set to the correct mileage totalof the old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set the tripodometer to zero.

The odometer works together with the DriverInformation Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A andTrip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 195.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Press the trip stem on theinstrument panel cluster.

Tachometer

The tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

176

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will sound for several seconds to remindyou buckle your safety belt. The driver safety beltlight will also come on and stay on for severalseconds, then it will flash for several more.You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 74 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

177

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 64.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.

Then the light should go out. This means thesystem is ready.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

178

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

United States

Canada

179

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a labelon your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

180

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 74 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 178.

181

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine is not running, but the ignitionis in RUN, this gage shows your battery’s stateof charge in DC volts.

United States Canada

182

When the engine is running, the gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The gagemay transition from a higher to lower or a lower tohigher reading. This is normal. Readingsbetween the low and high warning zones indicatethe normal operating range. The voltmetergage may also read lower when in fuel economymode. This is normal.

Readings in the low warning zone may occurwhen a large number of electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period. This conditionis normal since the charging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. As enginespeeds are increased, this condition should correctitself as higher engine speeds allow the chargingsystem to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with thereading in either warning zone. If you must drive,turn off all unnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate apossible problem in the electrical system. Havethe vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning LightWhen the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means yourvehicle has a brake problem. A chime may alsosound when the light comes on.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be abrake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.


183

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 302.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),this light will comeon when you start yourengine and maystay on for severalseconds, that is normal.

A chime may also sound when the light comes on.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, youdo not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 183 earlier in this section.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

184

StabiliTrak® Service Light

This light will come onbriefly when the engineis started.

This light will come on if a problem is detected inthe StabiliTrak® system.

For more information see StabiliTrak® System onpage 271.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This warning lightshould come onbriefly when theengine is started.

During most driving conditions, this light will notcome on. If the StabiliTrak® System is activelycontrolling the stability and/or traction of thevehicle, this light will blink. This is normal.

This light will come on if any portion of the systemhas been manually turned off or a problem isdetected in the system.

If your vehicle is equipped with a DriverInformation Center, a message will appear also,see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199and StabiliTrak® System on page 271 formore information.

185

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,the engine coolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 347.

Tire Pressure LightThis light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message willaccompany the light, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 199.Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 380 for more information.This light will flash for approximately 70 secondsand then turn on solid if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 391for more information.


186

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 322.

187

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 326.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

188

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 324. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

189

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oilpressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when theengine is running. Canadian vehicles indicatepressure in kPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readingsabove the low pressure zone indicate the normaloperating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may becaused by a dangerously low oil level or otherproblems causing low oil pressure.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.


190

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe key toward START.

See PASS-Key® III Operation on page 104 foradditional information regarding the security light.

Cruise Control Light

This light will come onwhen the cruise controlis set.

See Cruise Control on page 156 for moreinformation.

Reduced Engine Power Light

This light comes onwhen a noticeablereduction in thevehicle’s performanceoccurs.

The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speedwhen the reduced engine power light is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced.The performance may be reduced until the nexttime you drive your vehicle. If this light stayson, see your dealer as soon as possible fordiagnosis and repair.

This light may also come on if there is a problemwith the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)system. If this happens, take the vehicle in forservice as soon as possible.

191

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 153.

Service All-Wheel Drive Light

This light should comeon briefly when you turnon the ignition, as acheck to show you it isworking.

The service all-wheel drive light comes on toindicate that there may be a problem with the drivesystem and service is required. Malfunctionscan be indicated by the system before any problemis apparent, which may prevent serious damageto the vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your dealer in correctly diagnosing amalfunction.

Check Gages Warning Light

The check gages lightwill come on brieflywhen you are startingthe engine.

If the light comes on and stays on while you aredriving, check your coolant temperature andengine oil pressure gages to see if they are in thewarning zones.

192

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on,the liftgate or liftglass isnot completely shut.

Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with theliftgate or liftglass even partially open.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have remaining.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.


193

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on brieflywhen you are starting the engine.

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low onfuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.See Fuel on page 324.

Check Gas Cap Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come on ifyour gas cap is notsecurely fastened.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 187 formore information.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) display islocated on the instrument panel cluster, below thespeedometer. The DIC buttons are located onthe center of the instrument panel, above the radio.The DIC can display information such as the tripodometer, fuel economy, customization features,and warning/status messages.

r (Fuel Information): Press this button todisplay the fuel range, fuel used, average fueleconomy, and engine oil life. See DIC Operationand Displays on page 195 for more information.

194

3 (Trip Information): Press this button todisplay the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.See DIC Operation and Displays on page 195for more information.

| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazardwarning flashers on and off. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 150 for more information.

q (Customization): Press this button to accessthe vehicle settings menu and customize thepersonal settings on your vehicle. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 205 for more information.

r (Select): Press this button to reset certainDIC functions and set your customization settings.

Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledgeDIC messages and clear them from the DICdisplay.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.

If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the display. Pressing the trip stemon the instrument panel cluster or any of theDIC buttons will acknowledge any warningor service messages.

You should take any message that appears on thedisplay seriously and remember that clearingthe message will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the four DIC buttons locatedon the center of the instrument panel, above theradio. These buttons are fuel information, tripinformation, customization, and select. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following pages.

195

Fuel Information Button

r (Fuel Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the fuel range, fuel used, average fueleconomy, and the engine oil life system.

Fuel Range: Press the fuel information buttonuntil RANGE appears on the display. Thismode shows the remaining distance you can drivewithout refueling. It is based on fuel economyand the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The displaywill show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button untilFUEL USED appears on the display. This modeshows the number of gallons or liters of fuel usedsince the last reset of this menu item. To reset thefuel used information, press and hold the selectbutton for one second while FUEL USED isdisplayed.

Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuelinformation button until AVG. ECON appears on thedisplay. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (MPG), kilometers per liter (km/L), or litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle isgetting based on current and past drivingconditions.

Press and hold the select button for one secondwhile AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the averagefuel economy. Average fuel economy will then becalculated starting from that point. If the averagefuel economy is not reset, it will be continuallyupdated each time you drive.

Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuelinformation button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appearson the display. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after anoil change. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system, seeEngine Oil Life System on page 337.

196

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. SeeEngine Oil on page 334 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 450.

Trip Information Button

3 (Trip Information): Press this button toscroll through the odometer, trip odometers, tirepressures, and timer.

Odometer: Press the trip information button untilODOMETER appears on the display. Thismode shows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles or kilometers. Pressingthe trip stem located on the instrument panelcluster with the vehicle off will also displaythe odometer.

Trip A: Press the trip information button untilTRIP A appears on the display. This mode showsthe current distance traveled since the lastreset for TRIP A in either miles or kilometers.

Trip B: Press the trip information buttonuntil TRIP B appears on the display. This modeshows the current distance traveled since the lastreset for TRIP B in either miles or kilometers.

To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press andhold the select button for one second while inone of the trip modes. This will reset theinformation for TRIP A or TRIP B.

You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B whilethey are displayed by pressing the trip stem. If youpress and hold the trip stem or the select buttonfor more than four seconds, the display willshow the distance traveled since the last ignitioncycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.

197

Tire Pressures: Press the trip information buttonuntil TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display.This mode shows the tire pressure in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Pressthe select button to scroll through the followinginformation:

• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the frontdriver’s side tire.

• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the frontpassenger’s side tire.

• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the reardriver’s side tire.

• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rearpassenger’s side tire.

Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Pressthe select button while TIMER is displayed to startthe timer. The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted as long asthe ignition is on, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59),after which the display will roll back to zero.

To stop the counting of time, press the selectbutton briefly while TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theselect button while TIMER is displayed.

Customization Button

q (Customization): Press this button to accessthe VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customizethe settings to your vehicle. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 205 for more information.

Select Button

r (Select): Press the select button to resetcertain DIC functions, turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC display, and set yourcustomization settings. For example, this buttonwill allow you to reset the trip odometers, turnoff the FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and enablesyou to scroll through and select the languagein which the DIC information will appear.

198

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed to correctthe condition. Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction. Press any of the DIC buttons on theinstrument panel or the trip odometer reset stemon the instrument panel cluster to acknowledgethat you received the messages and to clear themfrom the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from thedisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can beremoved from the DIC display. Take any messagesthat appear on the display seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

CHANGE ENGINE OILThis message displays when the engine oil needsto be changed and service is required for yourvehicle. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 450and Engine Oil on page 334 for more information.Also see Engine Oil Life System on page 337for information on how to reset the message. Thismessage clears itself after 10 seconds until thenext ignition cycle.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.Press any of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem, toacknowledge this message and clear it fromthe DIC display.

If this message appears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation Label. See Tires on page 380, LoadingYour Vehicle on page 296, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 388. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning light comes on.See Tire Pressure Light on page 186.

199

CHECK WASHER FLUIDThis message displays if the washer fluid level islow. Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir clears this message. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 357. Thismessage clears itself after 10 seconds, or you canpress any of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem,to acknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display.

CURB VIEW ACTIVATEDThis message displays when the passengeroutside rearview mirror moves into the curb viewposition. See Outside Curb View Assist Mirroron page 124 for more information.

DRIVER DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s door is not fully closed. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC. Press any ofthe DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledgethis message and clear it from the DIC display.

ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINEOVERHEATED

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 347 for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds if thecooling system temperature gets hot. See EngineOverheating on page 347 for the proper course ofaction. This message clears when the coolanttemperature drops to a safe operating temperature.

FRONT FOG LAMPS OFFThis message displays if the fog lamps are turnedoff. The message clears after 10 seconds. If youturn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lampsalso turn off and this message appears on the DIC.The fog lamps turn back on again when you switchback to low-beam headlamps. See Fog Lamps onpage 162 and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 151 for more information.

200

FRONT FOG LAMPS ONThis message displays if the fog lamps are turnedon. The message clears after 10 seconds. SeeFog Lamps on page 162 and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151 for moreinformation.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and a chime sounds if thefuel level is low in the vehicle’s fuel tank. Refuelas soon as possible. Press any of the DIC buttons,or the trip stem, to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display. See LowFuel Warning Light on page 194, Filling the Tankon page 326, and Fuel on page 324 for moreinformation.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message may display if the outsidetemperature reaches a level where ice could formon the roadway. If the temperature rises to asafe level, the message clears. This messageclears itself after 10 seconds, or you can press anyof the DIC buttons, or the trip stem, toacknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display.

KEY FOB # BATTERY LOWThis message displays if a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 90. Press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

LEFT REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s side rear door is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC. Press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

201

OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 334 for more information.

This message displays if low oil pressurelevels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible and do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has been corrected. Checkthe oil as soon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 334.

PASSENGER DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s door is not fully closed. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC. Press any of the DICbuttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

REAR ACCESS OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if theliftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition isin RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgateand liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 98.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. Press any of the DIC buttons,or the trip stem, to acknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display.

RIGHT REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s side rear door is not fully closed.Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the door again. Checkto see if the message still appears on theDIC. Press any of the DIC buttons, or the tripstem, to acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the DIC display.

202

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your dealer inspectthe system for problems. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 178 and Airbag System on page 64for more information. Press any of the DICbuttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays if a problem occurs withthe brake system. If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restartthe vehicle and check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is still displayed, orappears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service. See your dealer.

SERVICE CHARGING SYS (System)This message displays if there is a problem with thebattery charging system. Under certain conditions,the charging system light may also turn on in theinstrument panel cluster. See Charging SystemLight on page 182. The battery will not be chargingat an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the abilityto enter the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safeto drive, however you should have the electricalsystem checked by your dealer. Press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

SERVICE STABILITRAKIf this message displays, it means there may be aproblem with the StabiliTrak® system. If thismessage appears, try to reset the system byperforming the following: stop; turn off the engine;then start the engine again. If this message stillcomes on, it means there is a problem. You shouldsee your dealer for service. The vehicle is safeto drive, however, you do not have the benefit ofStabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and driveaccordingly. Press any of the DIC buttons, or thetrip stem, to acknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display.

203

SERVICE TIRE MONITORThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

STABILITRAK ACTIVEThis message displays anytime the StabiliTrak®

system activates to maintain vehicle stability.Any combination of engine speed management,brake traction control, and stability control displaysthis message.

STABILITRAK NOT READYThis message may display if driving conditionsdelay StabiliTrak® system initialization. Thisis normal. Once the system initializes, thismessage will no longer be displayed on the DIC.

STABILITRAK OFFThis message displays when you press theStabiliTrak® button for more than five seconds orwhen stability control has been automaticallydisabled. The StabiliTrak® button is located on thetransmission shift handle. To limit wheel spinand realize the full benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you should normally leaveStabiliTrak® on. However, you should turnStabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock yourvehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving inextreme off-road conditions and require morewheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 295. To turn theStabiliTrak® system back on, press theStabiliTrak® button again.

The message may display if the brake systemwarning light is on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 183.

The message turns off as soon as the conditionsthat caused the message to be displayed areno longer present.

204

TIGHTEN FUEL CAPThis message may display and a chime may soundif the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly.Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank onpage 326. The diagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. This message remains on untilit is acknowledged and cleared from the DIC displayby pressing any of the DIC buttons or the trip stem.The DIC message is also cancelled if the ignition isturned off.

The DIC message and the Service Engine Soonlight may come on again during a second trip ifthe fuel cap is still not tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 187 formore information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when you momentarilypress the StabiliTrak® button located on thetransmission shift handle. In this mode, stabilitycontrol and the brake-traction control arefunctional. Engine speed management will bemodified and the driven wheels can spin morefreely. For more details on this mode, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 271.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if aturn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the offposition. Press any of the DIC buttons, or thetrip stem, to acknowledge this message and clearit from the DIC display.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program some features toone setting based on your preference. All of thecustomizable options listed may not be availableon your vehicle. Only the options available displayon the Driver Information Center (DIC).

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

To change feature preferences, make sure theignition is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

205

Press the customization button to scroll throughthe available customizable options.

After pressing the customization button, VEHICLESETTINGS momentarily displays before goingto a customization option.

Lock DoorsPress the customization button until LOCKDOORS: IN GEAR appears in the display.To select your preference for automatic locking,press the select button while LOCK DOORS:IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the followingchoices:

LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doorswill lock when the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P).

LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors willlock when the vehicle speed is above8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on automatic door locks, seeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 94.

Unlock DoorsPress the customization button until UNLOCKDOORS: IN PARK appears in the display.To select your preference for automatic unlocking,press the select button while UNLOCK DOORS:IN PARK is displayed on the DIC. Pressingthe select button will scroll through the followingchoices:

UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s doorwill be unlocked when the vehicle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors willnot be unlocked automatically.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on automatic door locks, seeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 94.

206

Lock FeedbackPress the customization button until LOCKFEEDBACK: BOTH appears in the display.To select your preference for the feedback youreceive when locking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press theselect button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the buttonwith the lock symbol on the RKE transmitterand the horn will chirp the second time you pressthe lock button.

LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be nofeedback when locking the vehicle.

LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lampswill flash each time you press the button withthe lock symbol on the RKE transmitter.

LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirpthe second time you press the button with the locksymbol on the RKE transmitter.Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

Unlock FeedbackPress the customization button until UNLOCKFEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. Toselect your preference for the feedback you willreceive when unlocking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press the selectbutton while UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default):The parking lamps will flash each time youpress the button with the unlock symbol on theRKE transmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn willchirp the second time you press the button with theunlock symbol on the RKE transmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the buttonwith the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter andthe horn will chirp the second time you pressthe unlock button.

207

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be nofeedback when unlocking the vehicle.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

Headlamp DelayPress the customization button until HEADLAMPDELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. Toselect your preference for how long the headlampswill stay on when you turn off the vehicle, pressthe select button while HEADLAMP DELAY:10 SEC is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the followingchoices:

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds)(default)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN

• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF

The amount of time you choose will be theamount of time that the headlamps stay on afteryou turn off the vehicle. If you choose OFF,the headlamps will turn off as soon as you turn offthe vehicle.Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

Perimeter LightsPress the customization button until PERIMETERLIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To selectyour preference for perimeter lighting, pressthe select button while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ONis displayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): Theheadlamps and back-up lamps will come on for40 seconds, if it is dark enough outside, when youunlock the vehicle with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lightswill not come on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

208

Easy Exit SeatPress the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT: OFF appears in the display. To select yourpreference for seat position exit, press theselect button while EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select buttonwill scroll through the following choices:

EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exitrecall will occur.

EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat willmove to the exit position when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on seat position exit,see “Easy Exit Seat” under Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals on page 11.

Seat RecallPress the customization button until SEATRECALL: OFF appears in the display. To selectyour preference for recall of the driver’s memoryseat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals, if your vehiclehas this feature, press the select button whileSEAT RECALL: OFF is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition you saved will only be recalled when thememory button 1 or 2 is pressed.

SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition you saved will be recalled when you putthe key in the ignition.

209

SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition you saved will be recalled whenyou unlock the vehicle with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature. Formore information on the memory seat feature, seeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 11.

Curb ViewPress the customization button until CURB VIEW:OFF appears in the display. To select yourpreference for curb view, press the select buttonwhile CURB VIEW: OFF is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’soutside mirror will not be tilted down whenthe vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’soutside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).

When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in anyforward gear, the mirror will return to the normaldriving position, following a short delay.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on tilt mirror in reverse,see Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 124.

Alarm WarningPress the customization button until ALARMWARNING: BOTH appears in the display. Toselect your preference for alarm warning, press theselect button while ALARM WARNING: BOTH isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): Theheadlamps will flash and the horn will chirp whenthe alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirpwhen the alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps willflash when the alarm is active.

210

ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarmwarning on activation.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while your choice isdisplayed on the DIC to select it and move on tothe next feature. For more information onalarm warning type, see Content Theft-Deterrenton page 102.

LanguagePress the customization button until LANGUAGE:ENGLISH appears in the display. To selectyour preference for display language, press theselect button while LANGUAGE: ENGLISHis displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select buttonwill scroll through the following languages:

• ENGLISH (default)

• FRANCAIS (French)

• ESPANOL (Spanish)

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

If you accidentally choose a language that you donot want or understand, press and hold thecustomization button and the trip informationbutton at the same time. The DIC will beginscrolling through the languages in their particularlanguage. English will be in English, Francaiswill be in French, and Espanol will be in Spanish.When you see the language that you wouldlike, release both buttons. The DIC will thendisplay the information in the language you chose.

You can also scroll through the differentlanguages by pressing and holding the trip resetstem for four seconds, as long as you are inthe odometer mode.

UnitsPress the customization button until UNITS: U.S.(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To selectEnglish or metric, press the select button whileUNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:• UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)• UNITS: METRIC (km/L)• UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)

211

If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information willbe displayed in English units. For example,distance will be displayed in miles (mi) and fueleconomy in miles per gallon (MPG). If METRIC(km/L) is chosen, all information will be displayedin metric units. For example, distance will bedisplayed in kilometers (km) and fuel economy inkilometers per liter (km/L). If METRIC (L/100 km)is chosen, all information will be displayed in metricunits. For example, distance will be displayed inkilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km).Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and exit out of the customizableoptions.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 264. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’s

audio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 264.

212

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 108 for more information.

Setting the TimePress and hold H until the correct hour appears onthe display. AM or PM will appear on the display(Radio with CD (UpLevel, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)).Press and hold M until the correct minuteappears on the display. The time can be set withthe ignition on or off.

213

Radio with CD XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

P (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or to decrease the volume.

DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

214

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP buttonwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP button until the desired option displays, thenhold this knob for two seconds. One beep soundsand the selected display becomes the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.Each higher setting allows for more volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, automatic volume increases the volume,as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.The volume level should always sound the same toyou as you drive. NONE displays if the radiocannot determine the vehicle speed. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF (automatic volume off) displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Theselection displays.

e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

t SEEK u: Press and release the right orthe left arrow to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN displays andone beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrow again or one ofthe pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds. PSCN displays and thetwo beeps sound. The radio goes to a presetstation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press either arrow again orone of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

215

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Serviceand MP3 Features): If the current stationhas a message, the information symbol displays.Press this button to see the message. Themessage can display the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theinformation button. A new group of wordsdisplay after every press of this button. Once thecomplete message displays, the informationsymbol disappears until another new message isreceived. The last message can be displayedby pressing the information button. The lastmessage can be viewed until a new message isreceived or you tune to a different station.

When a message is not available from a station,No Info displays.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) toselect the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set, returns and the equalization thatwas selected is stored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

216

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knobuntil BASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turnthis knob to increase or to decrease the tone. Thedisplay shows the bass or the treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and the treble to the middleposition, while in bass or treble, push and hold thetone knob. One beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knob whenno tone or speaker control displays. ALLCENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop,rock and classical.

The equalization one through seven options areincluded only if your vehicle has the Bose® system.Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalizationsettings designed for equalization one throughseven.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the tone knob until BASS andTREB displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, push andrelease this knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the speaker knobuntil FADE displays. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, while in fade or balance, push thetone knob, then push it again and hold it untilone beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knob whenno tone or speaker control is displayed. ALLCENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

217

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:

1. Press the CAT button to activate categoryselect mode. The current category displays.

2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to go to that category’sfirst station.

4. To go to another station within that categoryand the category is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow again. If CAT times out and is nolonger on the display, go back to Step 1.

5. Press CAT to exit category select mode orwait for CAT to time out.

If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOTFOUND displays and the radio returns to thelast station you were listening to.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 239 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. To insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP (display) knob.

218

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, READING and the CDsymbol displays. As each new track starts to play,the track number also displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 261 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

1r (Previous): Press this pushbutton toreverse within the track.

2[ (Next): Press this pushbutton to fast forwardwithin the track.

219

3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear atrack over again. RPT ON displays. The currenttrack continues to repeat. Press this pushbuttonagain to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.

4 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM ON displays. Press this pushbutton again toturn off random play. RDM OFF displays.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current or the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track. Ifa track is approximately 10 seconds into its song,press either the left or right arrow twice to getto the previous or next track.

To scan tracks, press either arrow for more thantwo seconds until one beep sounds and SCANdisplays. The CD searches the previous ornext tracks at two seconds per track. Press eitherarrow to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see howlong the current track has been playing. Theelapsed time of the track appears on the display.To change the default on the display, track orelapsed time, press this button until the desiredoption displays, then hold the button fortwo seconds. One beep sounds and theselected display becomes the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

B (CD): Press this button to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. The CD symbol displayswhen a CD is loaded.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select an equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is set whenever aCD is played. See “AUTO EQ” listed previouslyfor more information. If you select an EQ settingfor your CD, it is activated each time a CD plays.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject can be activated with either the ignition orradio off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition andradio off if this button is pressed first.

220

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 233 later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See Using an MP3 on page 233 later in thissection.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

221

Radio with Six-Disc CD XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

222

Playing the Radio

P (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or to decrease the volume.

DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob whilein XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY (program type),Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until the desired option displays, thenhold this knob for two seconds. One beep soundsand the selected display becomes the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.Each higher setting allows for more volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, automatic volume increases the volume,as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.The volume level should always sound the same toyou as you drive. NONE displays if the radiocannot determine the vehicle speed. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF (automatic volume off) displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Theselection displays.

e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

223

t SEEK u: Press and release the right or theleft arrow to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Press and hold either arrow for more thantwo seconds. SCAN displays and one beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither arrow again or one of the pushbuttons tostop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Press and hold this button until PSCN displays andtwo beeps sound. The radio goes to a presetstation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press either arrow again orone of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans preset stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite RadioService): If the current station has a message,the information symbol displays. Press this buttonto see the message. The message can displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage displays every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words display after everypress of this button. Once the complete messagedisplays, the information symbol disappears untilanother new message is received. The lastmessage can be displayed by pressing the INFObutton. The last message can be viewed until a newmessage is received or if you tune to a differentstation.

When a message is not available from a station, NoInfo displays.

1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button toplay stations that are programmed on theradio preset pushbuttons.

The radio only seeks preset stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

224

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) toselect the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knobuntil BASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turnthis knob to increase or to decrease the tone. Thedisplay shows the bass or the treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.To adjust the bass and the treble to the middleposition, while in bass or treble, push and hold thetone knob. One beep sounds.To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knob whenno tone or speaker control is displayed. ALLCENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop,rock and classical.

The equalization one through seven optionsare included only if your vehicle has the Bose®

system. Press the AUTO EQ button to selectequalization settings designed for equalizationone through seven.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the tone knob until BASS andTREB displays.

225

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, push andrelease this knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the tone knob untilFADE displays. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the tone knob, then push itagain and hold it until one beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, while in fade or balance, push andhold the tone knob when no tone or speakercontrol is displayed. ALL CENTERED displays anda beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:

1. Press the CAT button to activate categoryselect mode. The current category displays.

2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.

3. Once the desired category displays, presseither SEEK arrow to go to that category’sfirst station.

4. To go to another station within that categoryand the category is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow again. If CAT times out andno longer displays, go back to Step 1.

5. Press CAT to exit category select mode orwait for CAT to time out.

If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOTFOUND displays and the radio returns to thelast station you were listening to.

226

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to your dealerfor service.

LOC (Locked): This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 239 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, READING and the CDsymbol displays. As each new track starts to play,the track number also displays.



227





LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the rightof the slot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sounds and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, flashes and LOAD #displays.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert theCD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the indicator lightflashes again. Once the light stops flashing andturns green, you can load another CD. TheCD player takes up to six CDs. Do nottry to load more than six.

228

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the LOAD button to cancel theloading function. The radio begins to play the lastCD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD displays.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press theCD button, then press the numbered pushbuttonthat corresponds to the CD. A small bar appearsunder the CD number that is playing and thetrack number appears on the display.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the CD eject button forfive seconds.A beep sounds and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, flashes and EJECTALL displays.

2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,REMOVE CD # displays. The CD ejects andcan be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator lightflashes again and another CD ejects.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD orthe eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CDautomatically pulls back into the player. If CD ispushed back into the player, before the 25 secondtime ends, the player senses an error and tries toeject the CD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button toeject a CD after you have tried to push it inmanually. The player’s 25-second eject timerresets at each press of the eject button, causingthe player to not eject the CD until the 25-secondtime period has elapsed.

229

r (Reverse): Press this button to reverse withinthe track.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward within the track.

N (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackor an entire CD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the repeat button. RPT ONdisplays. Press this button again to turn offrepeat play. RPT OFF displays.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the repeat button for two seconds.RPT ON displays. Press this button againto turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.

y (Random): With the random setting, you canlisten to the tracks in random, rather thansequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release therandom button. RANDOM ONE displays.Press this button again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs thatare loaded in random order, press andhold this button for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL displays.Press this button again to turn off random play.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to the nexttrack. If either arrow is held or pressed more thanonce, the player continues moving backward orforward through the CD.

To scan one CD, press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN a displays and abeep sounds. The radio goes to the next track,plays for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.

230

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds until CD SCAN displaysand a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD.Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. The elapsedtime of the track displays. To change thedefault on the display, track or elapsed time, pressthis knob until the desired option displays, thenhold the knob for two seconds. One beep soundsand the selected display becomes the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to theradio when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s)remains inside the radio for future listening.



Using Song List Mode

R (Song List): The six-disc CD changer has afeature called song list. This feature is capableof saving 20 track selections.To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least

one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not display.If S-LIST displays, press the song list button toturn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKSCAN right arrow to locate the track to besaved. the track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the song list button to savethe track into memory. When the song listbutton is pressed, one beep sounds. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressing the songlist button, two beeps sound to confirm thetrack has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

231

S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than20 selections.To play the song list, press the song list button.One beep sounds and S-LIST displays. Therecorded tracks begins to play in the order theywere saved.Seek through the song list by using the SEEKSCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved trackreturns to the first saved track.To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:1. Turn the CD player on.2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.

S-LIST displays.3. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow to select the

desired track to be deleted.4. Press and hold the song list button for

two seconds. When the song list buttonis pressed, one beep sounds. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressing thesong list button, two beeps sound to confirmthat the track has been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the song list button for morethan four seconds. One beep sounds,followed by two beeps after two seconds, anda final beep sounds after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the songlist has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the song list button.One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed fromthe display.

232

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension, other file extensions might not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum can display when files are recordedusing ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc while burning anMP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usuallybetter to burn the disc all at once.

233

The player is able to read and play a maximumof 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlistnames can use more disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space on the disc,minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum will not play.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder is not displayed.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen go to the root folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

234

Order of PlayTracks play in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. See DISP later in this section for moreinformation. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the last page of textand the extension of the file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists whichwere created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you cannotedit them. These playlists are treated as specialfolders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays. TheCD should begin playing and the CD symboldisplays. To insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP (display) knob.

235

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.







1r (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reversewithin the same track. If this pushbutton is heldor pressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward through the CD.

2[ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton tofast forward within the track. If this pushbuttonis held or pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving forward through the CD.

236

3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear atrack over again. RPT On displays. The currenttrack continues to repeat. Press this pushbuttonagain to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.

4 y (Random): To random the tracks in thecurrent folder or playlist, press and release thispushbutton. FLDR RDM displays. Once all of thetracks in the current folder or playlist have played,the system moves on to the next folder or playlistand plays all of the tracks in random order.

To play all the tracks on the CD in random order,press and hold this pushbutton for two seconds. Abeep sounds and CD RDM displays. This featuredoes not work with playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow takes the CD to the next or previousrandomized track.

Press and release this pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. NO RDM displays.

5 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbuttonto go to the first track in the previous folder.Pressing this button while in folder random modetakes the CD to the previous folder andrandomizes the tracks in that folder.

6 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to goto the first track in the next folder. Pressingthis button while in folder random mode takes theCD to the next folder and randomizes thetracks in that folder.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the previous track. Press the right arrow togo to the start of the next track. Press eitherarrow for more than two seconds and SCANdisplays. The radio scans the previous ornext tracks at two tracks per second. Release thearrow to stop scanning and to play the track.

237

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switchbetween track mode, folder/playlist mode, andtime of day mode. The display shows onlyeight characters, but there can be up to four pagesof text. If there are more than eight charactersin the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing thisknob within two seconds takes the CD tothe next page of text. If there are no otherpages to be shown, pressing this knob withintwo seconds takes the CD to the nextdisplay mode.

• Track mode displays the current track numberand the ID3 tag song name.

• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folderor playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

• Time of day mode displays the time of day andthe ID3 tag song name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until the desired option displays,then hold this knob for two seconds. One beepsounds and the selected display becomesthe default.

4 (Information): INFO displays whenever acurrent track has ID3 tag information. Press thisbutton to display the artist name and albumcontained in the tag. INFO disappears from thedisplay when the information in the ID3 taghas finished.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.



Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject may be activated with either the ignition orradio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition andradio off if this button is pressed first.

238

XM Radio MessagesIf you have a Radio with CD, you will receive these radio display messages.

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

CH Unavl Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

239


No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

240

If you have a Radio with Six-Disc CD, you will receive these radio display messages.


XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

CH Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

241


No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

242

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemincludes a DVD player, a video display screen,two sets of wireless headphones, and a remotecontrol.

Parental ControlThis button is located behind the video screen.Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing tofreeze the video and mute the audio. The videoscreen will display Parental Control ON and thepower indicator light on the DVD player will flash. Itwill also disable all other button operations from theremote control and the DVD player, with theexception of the eject button. Press this buttonagain to restore operation of the DVD player.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume play ifthe ignition is in RUN, ACC, or if RAP is active.

Before You DriveThe RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.The driver cannot safely view the video screenwhile driving and should not try to do so.

243

HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.

Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.An indicator light will illuminate on the headphoneswhen they are on. If the light does not illuminate,the batteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” following for more information.

Each set of headphones has a volume knob.To adjust the volume, adjust this knob.

The transmitters are located below the videodisplay screen. The headphones will shutoff automatically if they lose the signal from thesystem after about four minutes to save batterypower. The signal may be lost if the systemis turned off or if the headphones are out ofrange of the transmitters.

When using the wired headphones, if the frontseat passengers play a CD in the Radio withSix-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ SatelliteRadio Service (if equipped), you will hear the audiofor these sources, instead of the DVD or CDthat is currently playing through the RSE.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment

door located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Tighten the screw to close thecompartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

244

Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located behind the videoscreen. The RCA jacks allow audio and videosignals to be connected from an auxiliary devicesuch as a camcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Standard RCA cables, notincluded, are needed to connect the auxiliarydevice to the RCA jacks. The yellow connectorinputs video and the red and white connectorsinput right and left audio. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper connectionof the auxiliary device.

To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE system power on. If theRSE system had been previously in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the SRCE button onthe faceplate or the remote control will switch theRSE system between the auxiliary device andthe DVD player.

How to Change the Video Format when inthe Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.In some countries, the video format may be inthe PAL system. To change the video format,perform the following:

1. Press the display menu button.

2. Press the down arrow button to highlight theVideo Format option.

3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.

4. Press the right or left arrow button to selectthe desired video format.

5. Press the enter button to accept the change.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs maybe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the RearSeat Audio system (if equipped)

245

The RSE system will always transmit the audiosignal by infrared to the wireless headphones,if there is audio available. See “Headphones”previously for more information.

The RSE system is capable of outputting audio tothe vehicle speakers by using the radio. TheRSE system may be selected as an audio sourceon the radio if the RSE system power is on.Once the RSE system is selected as an audiosource on the radio, adjust the speaker volume onthe radio, if necessary. If the RSE system poweris not on, the RSE system will not be an availablesource on the radio. Refer to the radio informationfor the radio that your vehicle has for moreinformation.

The RSE system is capable of outputting audio tothe wired headphone jacks on the rear seataudio system (if equipped). The RSE system maybe selected as an audio source on the rearseat audio system if the RSE system power is on.Refer to XXX for more information.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole. To use the video screen, push forwardon the release latch and the screen will fold down.Adjust the screen’s position as desired. Whenthe video screen is not in use, push it up into itslatched position.

The DVD player and display will continue tooperate when the screen is in the up or the downposition. The video screen contains thetransmitters for the wireless headphones and theremote control. If the screen is in the closedposition, the signals will not be available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

246

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overheadconsole. The DVD player can be controlled by thebuttons on the DVD player and/or by the buttonson the remote control. See “Remote Control” laterin this section for more information.

The DVD player power may be turned on whenthe ignition is in RUN, ACC, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate region code for thecountry that the vehicle was sold in. The DVDregion code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CDand Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported bythis DVD player. DVD-R and DVD-RW mediais supported if formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+Rand DVD+RW media may or may not be supportedby the DVD player. The DVD player does notsupport DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, and DVD Audiomedia. An error message will appear on thedisplay if this type of media is inserted into theDVD player.

When using the wired headphones, not included, ifthe front seat passengers play a CD in the Radiowith Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ SatelliteRadio Service (if equipped), you will hear the audiofor these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that iscurrently playing through the RSE.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

247

DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSEsystem on and off. The power indicator lightwill illuminate when the power is on.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Pressthis button twice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a DVD or CD. Press this button while aDVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this buttonagain to continue the play of the DVD or CD.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press the enter button.This button only operates when playing a DVD.

z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,and dynamic range compression. The dynamicrange compression feature can be used to reduceloud audio and increase low audio produced bysome DVDs.

To change a feature back to the factory defaultsetting, press this button to display the feature,then press and hold this button. The default settingwill appear on the display.

While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press andhold this button to display and to remove the trackand time information.

248

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)


c /X (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stopplaying, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVDor CD. Press this button twice to return tothe beginning of the DVD.

Press and hold this button for more thanthree seconds to eject a DVD or CD.

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc with the labelside up into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start, if the vehicle is in RUN,ACC, or when RAP is active.

If a disc is already in the player, press theplay/pause button on the DVD player faceplate oron the remote control.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or thepreviews. Some DVDs will begin playing after thepreviews have finished. If the DVD does notbegin to play the main title, refer to the on-screeninstructions.

249

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release the stopbutton on the DVD player faceplate or theremote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remotecontrol. The movie should resume play from whereit was last stopped, if the disc has not beenejected and the stop button has not been pressedtwice. If the disc has been ejected or if the stopbutton has been pressed twice, the disc willresume play at the beginning.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD player faceplateto eject the disc. There is not an eject button onthe remote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but is notremoved, the DVD player will reload the disc aftera short period of time. The disc will be storedin the DVD player. The DVD player will not resumeplay of the disc automatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow below the video screen and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight or very bright lightmay affect the ability of the RSE system toreceive signals from the remote control. If theremote control does not seem to be working, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

Objects blocking the line of sight may also affectthe function of the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

To extend the life of the batteries, the remotecontrol does not have a press and hold feature.

250

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVDplayer on and off.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,and dynamic range compression. The dynamicrange compression feature can be used to reduceloud audio and increase low audio produced bysome DVDs.

e (Audio): Press this button to display a menuthat will only appear when a DVD is being played.The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing,press this button again. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Pressthis button twice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

251

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to return to the previoustrack or chapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides you with the capability ofdirect chapter, title, and track number selection.

}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter, title, and track numbers greaterthan 9. Press this button before inputting thenumber.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter inputting a number to clear the number(s).

P (Illumination): Press this button to turnthe remote control backlight on. The backlight willtime out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no otherbutton is pressed while the backlight is on.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press the enter button.This button only operates when playing a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

| (Camera Angle): Press this button to changecamera angles on DVDs that have this featurewhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitlesand to move through subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction will vary for each disc.

252

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,press this button again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.


When the DVD is playing, press the pause buttonthen press the fast forward button. The DVD willcontinue playing in a slow play mode. To cancelslow play mode, press the play/pause button.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button toadvance to the beginning of the next trackor chapter. This button may not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Remove the battery compartment door locatedon the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

253

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

in on or accessory.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.The system might be inauxiliary mode.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.

The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on the topand bottom or on bothsides or it looksstretched out.

Check the displaymode settings in thedisplay menu.

The disc was ejected, butit was pulled back intothe DVD player.

The disc is being storedin the DVD player. Pressthe eject button again toeject the disc.

Problem Recommended ActionIn auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.Change the VideoFormat to PAL or NTSC.See “Stereo RCA Jacks”previously for how tochange the video format.

The language in theaudio or on the screenis wrong.

Check the audio orlanguage selection in themain DVD menu.

The remote control doesnot work.

Check to make surethere is no obstructionbetween the remotecontrol and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.

254

Problem Recommended ActionAfter stopping the player,I push Play butsometimes the DVDstarts where I left off andsometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player will resumeplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressedtwo times the DVD playerwill begin to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the DVDplayer is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

My disc is stuck in theplayer. The Load/Ejectbutton does not work.

Turn the DVD power off,then on, then press theload/eject button on theDVD player.Do not attempt to forciblyremove the disc from theDVD player. This couldpermanently damage thedisc and DVD player.

Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are facingthe front of the vehicle.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, butthere is no picture orsound.

Check that the DVDplayer is in DVD mode.

The audio/video skipsor jumps.

The DVD or CD could bedirty, scratched, ordamaged.

The audio from the radiofor the Radio withSix-Disc CD and XM™has taken over the audiofrom the DVD or CDwhen using the wiredheadphones.

The RSE is workingcorrectly.Use the wirelessheadphones or have thefront seat passengerslisten to another audiosource.

255

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen:

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if thedisc is not readable, or if the format is notcompatible with the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayedif the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayedif the DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratchedor damaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will bedisplayed if the region code of the DVD is notcompatible with the region code of the DVD player.

No Disc: This message will be displayed if anyof the buttons on the DVD faceplate or remotecontrol are pressed and no disc is present in theDVD player.

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with audio distortionin the wireless headphones when operatingcellular phones, scanners, CB radios, GlobalPositioning Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios,mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

* Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the Video ScreenPour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a cleancloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do notspray directly onto the screen and do not press toohard or too long on the video screen.

256

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to selectand listen to any of the available radio sources:AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rearseat passenger cannot control a source selectedon the radio by someone in the front of thevehicle. For example, the RSA cannot be used tochange CD tracks if the radio is set to CD.Also, if the radio is switched to a source the RSAhas control of, sound will not be lost, but theRSA will lose control of that sourse.

Rear seat passengers always have control of thevolume for each set of headphones.

The RSA will run when the radio is off if theignition key is positioned in the power mode, seeXXX in this manual.

P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA onor off. The rear speakers are muted when thepower is turned on.

u (Volume): The left-hand knob controls theheadphone outlet on the left and the right-handknob controls the headphone outlet on theright. Turn either knob clockwise to increase thevolume and counterclockwise to decrease thevolume.

257

SRCE (Source): Press this button to select anaudio source: AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. Theinactive CD, or DVD will remain safely inside theradio for future listening. There are sources that areinternal to the radio, such as AM/FM, and CD andother sources to radio that are external, such asXM™, DVD, and OnStar®. If an external source hasbeen selected, the rear seat passengers cannotselect a different external source.

SEEK: Press this button to go to the next stationor CD track and stay there. The display willshow the selection. This function is inactive if theradio is set to the same source.

To scan preset radio stations, press and hold theSEEK button for two seconds and the radiowill go to the next preset station. Hold this buttondown and the radio will continue to go throughall available preset stations. This function isinactive if the front seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button togo to the next track on the CD. This functionis inactive if the front seat passengers are listeningto a CD.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player,press and hold the SEEK button for two secondsto go you to the next CD, if multiple CDs areloaded. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved toa different vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKEDdisplays.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®

is armed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does notoperate if stolen.

258

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can be adjusted at thesteering wheel. They include the following:

u SEEK t: Press the forward or the backarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation and stay there. The radio will onlyseek stations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing, press the forward or theback arrow to fast forward or reverse.

g (OnStar®/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar,press this button to interact with the OnStarsystem. See the OnStar® System on page 125 inthis manual for more information.

If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press thisbutton to mute the system. Press it again, orany other radio button, to turn on the sound.

NXT (Next): Press this button to play a stationyou have programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons. The radio will only seek presetstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing in the CD changer, pressthis button to go to the next available CD, ifmultiple CDs are loaded.

+ SRC − (Source): Press plus (+) or the minus (−)button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 orXM2 (if equipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded theCD symbol will appear on the display.

+ VOL − (Volume): Press the plus (+) or the (−)button to increase or to decrease the volume.

259

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

260

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the antenna base located onthe hood of the vehicle. If tightening is required,tighten by hand.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

261

✍ NOTES

262

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 264Defensive Driving ...................................... 264Drunken Driving ........................................ 265Control of a Vehicle .................................. 268Braking ...................................................... 268Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 269Braking in Emergencies ............................. 271Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 271StabiliTrak® System ................................... 271All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 275Steering .................................................... 276Off-Road Recovery .................................... 278Passing ..................................................... 278Loss of Control .......................................... 280Off-Road Driving ........................................ 281Driving at Night ......................................... 281Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 282

City Driving ............................................... 285Freeway Driving ........................................ 286Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 287Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 288Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 288Winter Driving ........................................... 291If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 295Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 296Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 296

Towing ........................................................ 302Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 302Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 302Electronically Controlled Air

Suspension System ................................ 303Towing a Trailer ........................................ 305

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

263

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

264

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

265

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

266

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

267

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-Saab accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 322.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 183.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

268

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 184.

Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRPproblem, both the brake and ABS warning lightswill come on accompanied by a 10-secondchime. The lights and chime will come on eachtime the ignition is turned on until the problem isrepaired. See your dealer for service.

269

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

270

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayfeel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice somenoise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour vehicle may have this feature. A limited-sliprear axle can give you additional traction onsnow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, but when one ofthe rear wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with traction tomove the vehicle.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,Electronic Stability Control (ESC) which combinesantilock brake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle in most driving conditions.

Traction control activates when the controllersenses wheel spin. StabiliTrak® will selectivelyapply the brakes and reduce engine torque to helpregain traction.

Stability control activates when the controllersenses a discrepancy between your intendedpath and the direction the vehicle is travelling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure atany one of the vehicle’s brakes to help guidethe vehicle in the direction which you are steering.

271

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to insure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working. This is normaland does not mean there is a problem withyour vehicle. If driving conditions delay systeminitialization, the STABILITRAK NOT READYmessage may be displayed. If this is the case,your vehicle does not need servicing.

For more information on the stability messages,see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 199.

When the StabiliTrak®

system is both on andactively controllingthe stability of thevehicle, the StabiliTrak®

light will blink for theduration of the event.

You may also feel or hear the system working.This is normal.

The StabiliTrak® disablebutton is located onthe transmissionshift handle.

The StabiliTrak® system has three modes ofoperation: STABILITRAK ON, TRACTIONCONTROL OFF, and STABILITRAK OFF.

STABILITRAK ON — The vehicle will default toSTABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts thevehicle. The StabiliTrak® light will be off and noDIC messages will be displayed.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF — The driver canmodify the engine speed management system bymomentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® button on thetransmission shift handle. The StabiliTrak® light willcome on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF will bedisplayed. For vehicles without a DIC, theStabiliTrak® indicator light will come on.Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® buttonagain will return the system to the STABILITRAKON mode.

272

STABILITRAK OFF — The driver can turn offStabiliTrak® by pressing the StabiliTrak® button formore than five seconds. The StabiliTrak® lightwill come on and STABILITRAK OFF will bedisplayed. For vehicles without a DIC, theStabiliTrak® indicator light will come on.Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® button againwill return the system to the STABILITRAK ONmode. See StabiliTrak® Off below for moreinformation.

Traction Control OffIn this mode, stability control and brake-tractioncontrol are functional. Engine speed managementwill be modified and the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause the brake-tractioncontrol to activate more frequently. If the controllerdetects excessive wheel spin in this mode, theStabiliTrak® indicator light may blink and theSTABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayedto warn the driver that damage may occur to thetransfer case.

StabiliTrak® OffIn this mode, both stability control and part of thetraction control system are disabled. Your vehiclewill still have brake-traction control, but will notbe able to use the engine speed managementsystem. You may still hear system noisesas a result of the brake-traction control coming on.If the controller detects excessive wheel spin inthis mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light may blinkand the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message maybe displayed to warn the driver that damage mayoccur to the transfer case.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you may wantto “rock” your vehicle in an attempt to free it. It mayalso be necessary to turn off the system whendriving in extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 295 formore information.

273

The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® system events and the corresponding messages and lightsthat will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.

Vehicles with a DIC Vehicles without a DIC Event

StabiliTrak®

Indicator Light DIC Message StabiliTrak®

Indicator LightStabiliTrak®

Service Light —

Off None Off Off

StabiliTrak® On mode(System is fully enabled,

but is not activelycontrolling vehicle stability).

Solid Traction Control Off Solid Off Traction Control Off Mode

Solid StabiliTrak® Off Solid Off

StabiliTrak® Off Mode(StabiliTrak® indicator lightwill flash when system first

enters this mode).

Blinking StabiliTrak® Active Blinking Off

StabiliTrak® systemactivates using engine

speed management, braketraction control, and/or

stability control.

Solid Service StabiliTrak® Solid SolidStabiliTrak® system is

disabled due to asystem fault.

Solid StabiliTrak®

Not Ready Solid OffStabiliTrak® system is

disabled due to a failureto initialize.

274

Notice: If the StabiliTrak® light comes on dueto heavy braking and/or because the tractioncontrol system has been continuously active,do not allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spinexcessively. If you do, you may be causingdamage to the transfer case. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by your warranty.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle tospin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABSand brake warning lights and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are displayed, youcould damage the transfer case. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights and this messageare displayed.

StabiliTrak® may activate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavy accelerationwhile turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, you maynotice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear anoise or vibration. This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the StabiliTrak® light will blink, andthe cruise control will automatically disengage.

When road conditions allow, you may re-engagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 156.

StabiliTrak® will turn off automatically if a problemis detected in the system. The StabiliTrak®

light will come on and SERVICE STABILITRAKwill be displayed on the DIC. For vehicles without aDIC, the StabiliTrak® light and the StabiliTrak®

service light will both come on. If the SERVICESTABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak® servicelight) does not clear itself after restarting thevehicle, you should see your dealer for service.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 322 for more information.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemYour vehicle has this feature. There is no lever orswitch to engage or disengage the front axle. Itis fully automatic and adjusts as needed forroad conditions. Your vehicle has an activetransfer case allowing two-wheel-drive operationon dry roads. The transfer case will shiftautomatically into all-wheel drive on slipperysurfaces. You may feel an extra shift when theall-wheel drive engages.

275

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


276

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 268. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

277

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

278

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

279

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

280

Off-Road DrivingYour vehicle does not have features like addedground clearance, special underbody shielding, anda transfer case low gear range, things that arenecessary for extended or severe off-road service.You should not drive off-road unless you are on alevel, solid surface.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

281

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or evenseveral seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to thedark. When you are faced with severe glare, asfrom a driver who does not lower the high beams, ora vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down alittle. Avoid staring directly into the approachingheadlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

282

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles, orother vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

283

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 380.

284

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 286.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

285

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

286

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower thanyou actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin dealerships all across North America. They willbe ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

287

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into arest, service, or parking area and take a nap,get some exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

288

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

289

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

290

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 380.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

291

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

292

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 269.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

293

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

294

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transmission orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting thetransmission back and forth, you can destroythe transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 404.

295

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)and a forward gear, spinning the wheels aslittle as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear. Byslowly spinning the wheels in the forward andreverse directions, you will cause a rocking motionthat may free your vehicle. If that does not getyour vehicle out after a few tries, it may need to betowed out. If your vehicle does need to betowed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 302.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it was designed to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

296

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label showsthe number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 380 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 388.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Label Example

297

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle. See Towinga Trailer on page 305 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

298

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

299




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Your vehicle has an electronically controlled airsuspension system that automatically keeps yourvehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle.See Electronically Controlled Air SuspensionSystem on page 303 for additional information.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isfound on the rear edge of the driver’s door.The label shows the size of your vehicle’s originaltires and the inflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.

Example 3

300

This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailertongue weight, if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To findout the actual loads on your front and rear axles,you need to go to a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sureto spread out your load equally on both sides of thecenterline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have differentGVWRs and capacity weights. Please note yourvehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consultyour dealer for additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your vehicle’sweight ratings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

301

If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else they will goas fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 469.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

302

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withany of its wheels on the ground. If your vehiclemust be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlierin this section.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even withonly two of its wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheelswill be on the ground.

Electronically Controlled AirSuspension SystemYour vehicle is equipped with an electronicallycontrolled air suspension system that automaticallykeeps your vehicle level as you load and unload.The system includes a compressor, two heightsensors, and two air springs supporting therear axle.

The system also has an internal clock to preventoverheating if the inflator is used for prolongedperiods. If the system overheats, all leveling

function stops until the system cools down.During this time, the indicator light on the airinflator switch will be flashing.

The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate,in order to raise the vehicle to the standard rideheight after loading. The system can lowerthe vehicle to the standard ride height afterunloading with the ignition on and also for up to30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

You may hear the compressor operating when youload your vehicle, and periodically as the systemadjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height.

Load leveling will not function normally with theinflator hose attached to the inflator outlet. Removethe inflator hose from the outlet during loadingand unloading.

If the vehicle is parked for an extended period oftime, some bleed down of the suspension isnormal. Upon starting the vehicle, proper heightwill be achieved.

303

Overload ProtectionThe air suspension system is equipped withoverload protection. Overload protection isdesigned to protect the air suspension system,and it is an indicator to the driver that thevehicle is overloaded. When the overloadprotection mode is on, it will not allow damage tothe air compressor. However, do not overloadthe vehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 296.

If the suspension remains at a low height,the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR(Gross Axle Weight Rating). When the overloadprotection mode is activated, the compressoroperates for about 30 seconds to one minutewithout raising the vehicle depending on theamount of overload. This will continue each timethe ignition is turned on until the rear axle loadis reduced below GAWR.

Indicator LightThe indicator light on the inflator switch in therear passenger compartment also serves as anindicator for internal system error. If the indicatorlight is flashing without the load leveling functionor the inflator being active, turn off the ignition.The next day turn on the ignition and checkthe indicator light. The vehicle can be driven withthe light flashing, but if it is you should havethe vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

304

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your dealerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs that would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always follow the instructions in thissection and check with your dealer for moreinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

305

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want toshift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, ifnecessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions).

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

306

Use the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. *GCWR

AWD (L6 Engine) 3.73 5,600 lbs (2 540 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)

AWD (V8 Engine) 3.73 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)is the total allowable weight of the completelyloaded vehicle and trailer including anypassengers, cargo, equipment and conversion.The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us atour Customer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 468.

307

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 296 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,up to a maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weightcarrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A)should be 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight, up to a maximum of 750 lbs (340 kg)with a weight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

308

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross VehicleWeight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weightmay reduce your trailering capacity more thanthe total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at thefront axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rearaxle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg),a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and aGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much. The weight at the rear axle couldbe 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings thetotal to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,but within the limit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

309

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).

You may go further and think you must limittongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) toavoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must stillconsider the effect on the rear axle. Because yourrear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), youcan only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axlewithout exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actual weight.Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves youwith being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) oftongue weight. Since tongue weight is usuallyat least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight,you can expect that the largest trailer your vehiclecan properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

310

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification label at the rear edge of thedriver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 296 for more information. Then be sure youdon’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailertongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, makesure you don’t go over the rear axle limit beforeyou apply the weight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll needthe right hitch.

Weight Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitchmust be adjusted so the distance (A) remainsthe same both before and after coupling the trailerto the tow vehicle.

(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle

311

If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,will weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sureto use a properly mounted weight-distributinghitch and sway control of the proper size.This equipment is very important for propervehicle loading and good handling when driving.Always use a sway control if the trailer willweigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do not attach them tothe bumper. Always leave just enough slack soyou can turn with your rig. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — andthey must be adequate. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into thevehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from yourvehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make thebrake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinderthat sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’tuse copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bendand finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

312

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open andyou pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness or death.See Engine Exhaust on page 119.To maximize your safety when towinga trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.



• If exhaust does come into your vehiclethrough a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use the climate controlsetting for maximum air because itonly recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 167.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

313

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connection,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

314

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear,under heavy loads or hilly conditions.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolant willboil at a lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,your vehicle may show signs similar to engineoverheating. To avoid this, let the engine run whileparked (preferably on level ground) with theautomatic transmission in PARK (P) for a fewminutes before turning the engine off. If you do getthe overheat warning, see Engine Overheatingon page 347.

315

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn yourwheels away from the curb. When parkingdownhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

316

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engineoil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered inthis manual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle is equipped with a seven-wire trailertowing harness. This harness has a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailer connector (if equippedwith the trailering package) that is attached to abracket on the hitch platform. If your vehicle is notequipped with the heavy-duty trailer connector,you can purchase one from your Saab dealer.

The seven-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal• Brown: Running Lamps• White: Ground• Light Green: Back-up Lamps• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes• Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring

terminal must be fastened to a stud on theunderhood electrical center before thetrailer feed will become active.)

If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standardfour-way round pin connector, an adapter connectoris available from your dealer.If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,turn on the headlamps to boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery.Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for anelectric trailer brake controller. These wires arelocated inside the vehicle on the driver’s side underthe instrument panel. These wires should beconnected to an electric trailer brake controller byyour dealer or a qualified service center.

317

✍ NOTES

318

Service ........................................................ 322Accessories and Modifications ................... 322California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 322Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 323Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 323Fuel ............................................................. 324

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 324Gasoline Specifications .............................. 324California Fuel ........................................... 324Additives ................................................... 325Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 326Filling the Tank ......................................... 326Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 328

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 329Hood Release ........................................... 329Engine Compartment Overview .................. 330Engine Oil ................................................. 334Engine Oil Life System .............................. 337Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 339Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 341Engine Coolant .......................................... 344Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 347

Engine Overheating ................................... 347Cooling System ......................................... 349Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 355Power Steering Fluid ................................. 356Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 357Brakes ...................................................... 358Battery ...................................................... 361Jump Starting ............................................ 362

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 368Rear Axle .................................................... 369Front Axle ................................................... 370Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 371Bulb Replacement ....................................... 371

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........ 371Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 372Headlamps ................................................ 372Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ....................................... 374Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .............. 374License Plate Lamp ................................... 376Replacement Bulbs ................................... 376

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

319

Windshield Replacement ............................ 377Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 377Tires ............................................................ 380

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 381Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 385Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 388High-Speed Operation ............................... 390Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 391Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 396When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 397Buying New Tires ...................................... 398Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 400Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 400Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 402Wheel Replacement .................................. 402Tire Chains ............................................... 404Accessory Inflator ...................................... 404If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 406Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 406Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 408Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ......................... 410

Secondary Latch System ........................... 416Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 420Spare Tire ................................................. 423

Appearance Care ........................................ 423Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 423Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 425Leather ...................................................... 426Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 426Care of Safety Belts .................................. 427Weatherstrips ............................................ 427Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 427Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 428Finish Care ............................................... 428Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .... 429Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 429Tires ......................................................... 430Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 430Finish Damage .......................................... 430Underbody Maintenance ............................ 431Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 431Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 432


320

Vehicle Identification .................................. 433Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 433Service Parts Identification Label ............... 433

Electrical System ........................................ 434Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 434Headlamps ................................................ 434Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 434

Power Windows andOther Power Options ............................. 435

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 435Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 435Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 442

Capacities and Specifications .................... 445


321

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service and parts needs.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saab accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saab accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your Saab dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine Saab accessories. When you go toyour Saab dealer and ask for Saab accessories,you will know that Saab-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the workusing genuine Saab accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

322

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 80.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 462.

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

323

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, we recommendthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 325 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehiclemay fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 187. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.

324

If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problemsdue to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Also, your dealer has additives that willhelp correct and prevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. We recommend that youuse these gasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier. However,E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be usedin vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return toyour dealer for service.

325

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuelor refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,flames, and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle.This is against the law in some places.Keep children away from the fuel pump;never let children pump fuel.

326

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignitesit, you could be badly burned. Fuel canspray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. This spray can happen if yourtank is nearly full, and is more likely in hotweather. Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 427.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 187.

327

There may also be a light that comes on in theinstrument panel to let you know if your gas capis not properly installed. See Check Gas Cap Lighton page 194 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 187.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

328

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release1. To open the hood,

first pull the handlewith this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehicleunder the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pushthe secondary hood latch up and to the rightto release it, then lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly. Check to make sure the hoodis closed and repeat the process if necessary.

329

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:

330

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 339.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 349.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 357.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 356.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 341.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 334.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 347.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 334.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).See Jump Starting on page 362.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 358.

K. Battery. See Battery on page 361.L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 435.

331

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

332

A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 349.

B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 339.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 357.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 334.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 341.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 334.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 347.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).See Jump Starting on page 362.

I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 356.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 358.

K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 435.

L. Battery. See Battery on page 361.

333

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 330for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

4.2L L6 Engine

5.3L V8 Engine

334

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L)for the 4.2L L6 engine or below thecross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick forthe 5.3L V8 engine, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 445.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area (F) that shows theproper operating range for the 4.2L L6 engineor above the cross-hatched area for the5.3L V8 engine, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 330 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.

335

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingstandard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets standardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

336

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting standard GM6094M andhave the starburst symbol on the front of the oilcontainer.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting standard GM6094M and showing theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified ForGasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure touse the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet standardGM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

337

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL messagewill come on in the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 199. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system may not indicatethat an oil change is necessary for over ayear. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform this work and resetthe system. It is also important to check the oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life SystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL message being turned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do thefollowing:

1. Use the fuel button on the Driver InformationCenter to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen.

2. Press and hold the select button on theDriver Information Center five secondswhile ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.

3. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display for10 seconds to let you know the systemis reset.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comesback on when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

338

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose ofoil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer,a service station, or a local recycling centerfor help.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee EngineCompartment Overviewon page 330 for thelocation of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to InspectInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 450 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

339

How to InspectTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Remove the screws on the enginecleaner/filter and lift off the cover.

2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing.Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirtas possible.

3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

340

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check your automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervalslisted in Additional Required Services on page 452,and be sure to use the transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 458.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the enginetemperature gage moves and then remains steadyfor 10 minutes.

341

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehiclehas been sitting for eight hours or more with theengine off, but this is used only as a reference.Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it iscolder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle theengine longer. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, you must check the fluidhot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hotwill give you a more accurate reading of thefluid level.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutesor more.

Then, without shutting off the engine,follow these steps:

1. Flip the handle up and then remove thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

The automatictransmission dipstickhandle with this symbolon it is located in theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 330 for more information on location.

2. Reinstall it back in all the way, wait threeseconds and then pull it back out again. Ifthe dipstick does not go down the tube easily,turn the blade and try again until it is fullyinserted in the tube.

342

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in the COLDarea, below the cross-hatched area, for a coldcheck or in the HOT or cross-hatched area fora hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstickpointed down to get an accurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way;then flip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice usingthe procedure described previously. Consistency(repeatable readings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If inconsistent readingspersist, contact your dealer.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.

Add fluid only after checking the transmissionfluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as areference. If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check. It does not takemuch fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 458.• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as

described under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstick in place.

343

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 347.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at thefirst maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you usethis coolant mixture, you do not need to addanything else.

344

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 458 for more information.

345

Checking CoolantThe engine coolantrecovery tank is in theengine compartmenton the passenger’sside of the vehicle.The cap has this symbolon it. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 330 for moreinformation on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atFULL COLD, or a little higher.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Never turnthe radiator pressure cap — even alittle — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

346

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 349.

Radiator Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 330for information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 186 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the display will show an Engine CoolantHot/Engine Overheated message. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 199 for moreinformation.

347

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see orhear steam coming from it. Just turn it offand get everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools down. Wait until there is nosign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned. Stopyour engine if it overheats, and get out ofthe vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

348

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can pushdown the accelerator until the engine speedis about twice as fast as normal idle speed forat least three minutes while you are parked. If youstill have the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Fan

4.2L L6 Engine

349

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Fan

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level shouldbe at least up to theFULL COLD mark.If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressurecap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else inthe cooling system.

5.3L V8 Engine

350

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engineagain. The engine cooling fan speed shouldincrease when idle speed is doubled by pushingthe accelerator pedal down. If it does not,your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

351

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark,add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 344for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

352

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure capwhen the cooling system, including theradiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose,is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one full turn. If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Removethe pressure cap.

353

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 344for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL COLD mark.

5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

354

6. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tightand fully seated.

Engine Fan NoiseYour vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In mosteveryday driving conditions the clutch is notengaged. This improves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailertowing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fanspeed increases when the clutch engages soyou may hear an increase in fan noise. This isnormal and should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or making extra shifts. It ismerely the cooling system functioning properly.The fan will slow down when additional cooling isnot required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you startthe engine. It will go away as the fan clutchdisengages.

355

Power Steering FluidSee EngineCompartment Overviewon page 330 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluidloss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the levelshould be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles withthe 5.3L V8 engine, the level should be at theFULL mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid tobring the level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

356

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidOpen the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 330for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

357

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 330 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid” inthis section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 450.

358

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking offthe cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be aboveMIN. If it is not, haveyour brake systemchecked to see if thereis a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 458.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 427.

359

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your discbrakes adjust for wear.

360

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For example,if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong foryour vehicle, the balance between your frontand rear brakes can change — for the worse.The braking performance you have come to expectcan change in many other ways if someoneputs in the wrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 330 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

361

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 362 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

362

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets, if equipped. Turn off the radio and alllamps that are not needed. This will avoidsparks and help to save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

363

4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminals on each battery. Your vehicle has aremote negative (−) jump starting terminal.You should always use this remote terminalinstead of the terminal on the battery.The remote negative (−) terminal is located onthe front engine lift bracket on vehicles withthe 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessorydrive bracket for vehicles with the5.3L V8 engine, and is marked GND (Ground).See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 330 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.But if a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

364

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+)to negative (−) or you will get a short thatwould damage the battery and maybe otherparts too. And do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe positive (+)terminal of the deadbattery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

365

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to the remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery. Yourvehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal,marked GND, for this purpose.

The remote negative (−) terminal is locatedon the front engine lift bracket for the4.2L L6 engine, and on the accessory drivebracket for the 5.3L V8 engine.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

4.2L L6 Engine 5.3L V8 Engine

366

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

367

All-Wheel DriveWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accuratereading, the vehicleshould be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.

368

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)below the bottom of the filler plug hole, locatedon the rear axle.

What to UseTo add lubricant when the level is low, useSAE 75W–90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM PartNo. U.S. 12378261, in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115. To completely refill afterdraining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip AxleLubricant Additive (GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, inCanada 992694). Then fill to the bottom of the fillerplug hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.

369

Front AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant.

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricantto raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below thefiller plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 458.

370

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the headlamp aim may be affected.Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlamps maybe necessary if it is difficult to see the lanemarkers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming driversflash their high-beam headlamps at you (forvertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 376.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer or aqualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

371

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 329.

2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips to releasethe headlamp assembly from the vehicle.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from thevehicle to access the electrical connectors.

372

4. Remove the bulb cover for the high beam (A)and low beam (B) bulbs.

5. Remove the bulb socket that needs to bereplaced by turning it counterclockwise.

6. Disconnect the electrical connector fromthe old bulb.

7. Plug the electrical connector into the newbulb using care not to touch the glass withyour fingers.

8. Install the new bulb socket and turn itclockwise to secure.

9. Reinstall the bulb covers.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall.

11. Press down on the retaining clips to securethe headlamp assembly.

373

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker andParking LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 under Headlamps onpage 372 to access the front turn signal,sidemarker or parking lamp.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove it from the lamp assembly.

3. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb torelease it from the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into the socket until itclicks.

5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assemblyand turn it clockwise to secure.

6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining upthe headlamp assembly with the slots in theheadlamp retaining clips.

7. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips tosecure the headlamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

A. Back-up LampB. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Stoplamp/TaillampD. Sidemarker Lamp

374

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglasson page 98 for more information.

2. Remove the screwsfrom the taillampassembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from thevehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillamp assembly.

5. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release itfrom the socket.

6. Push the new bulb into the socket untilit clicks.

7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillampassembly and turn it clockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining upthe locator pins with the retainers in the bodyof the vehicle.

9. Reinstall the two screws and tighten.

10. Close the liftgate.

375

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding thelicense plate lamp lens.

2. Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out from thebulb socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Replace the lamp assembly lens and tightenthe screws.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Parking, Turn Signal Lamp 5702 NAK

Front/Rear Sidemarker 194

License Plate Lamp W5W

Halogen Headlamps

High-Beam 9005

Low-Beam (Halogen Only) H11

Rear Turn Signal 3757 AK

Stoplamp and Taillamp 3157

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

376

Windshield ReplacementYour vehicle is equipped with an acousticwindshield. If you ever have to have yourwindshield replaced be sure to get an acousticwindshield so you will continue to have the benefitsan acoustic windshield can provide.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 450.

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touchthe windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiperarm until it locks into a vertical position.

A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab

D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivotlocking tab. Pull down on the bladeassembly to release it from the wiperarm hook.

377

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The insert has two notches at one end thatare locked by the bottom claws of theblade assembly. At the notched end, pull theinsert from the blade assembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide theinsert (D), notched end last, into the endwith two blade claws (A). Slide the insert allthe way through the blade claws at theopposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will beforced off as the insert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by thebottom claws. Make sure that all other claws areproperly locked on both sides of the insert slots.

A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and bladeassembly onto the windshield.

378

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out ofthe park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from thebackglass. The backglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, so care shouldbe used when pulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull itoff of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm inposition and push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the parkrest position.

379

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saab Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 296.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 388.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 390 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

380

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustrations are examplesof a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only one sidemay have the date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

381

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information, see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 400.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 388and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

382

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used in a dualconfiguration. For information on recommendedtire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 388 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used as asingle. For information on recommendedtire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 388 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

383

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts ofa tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first two characters in thetire size means a light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,as shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric)tire illustration, it would mean that the tire’ssidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of atire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

384

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may bemade from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 388.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

385

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 296.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 388 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 296.

386

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 397.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 400.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 296.

387

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below thedriver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressures for your tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,shown on the label, is the minimum amount of airpressure needed to support your vehicle’smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 296. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

388

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may look properly inflated even whenthey’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loading information label,no further adjustment is necessary. If thepressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

389

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have acrash and you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehiclecan be driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speed operation,in excellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has P255/55R18 104H size tiresinstalled on the rear axle, they will requireinflation pressure adjustment when driving yourvehicle at speeds above 99 mph (160 km/h).

Set the cold inflation pressure, for the rear tiresonly, to the maximum inflation pressure shown onthe tire sidewall, or 36 psi (248 kPa), whicheveris lower. See the example following. When you endthis high-speed driving, return the tires to thecold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 296.

Example:You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at36 psi (248 kPa).

The inflation pressure for the front tires should beset to the cold tire inflation pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label.

Racing or other competitive driving may affect thewarranty coverage of your vehicle. See yourwarranty booklet for more information.

390

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. TPMS sensors are mounted on each tireand wheel assembly, except the spare tire.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a lowtire pressure condition exists. Tire pressurelevels may also be checked by using the DriverInformation Center (DIC) Trip Informationbutton, located on the instrument panel. See “TirePressures” under DIC Operation and Displayson page 195 for additional information.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located on the instrument panelcluster, and at the same time a message will alsoappear on the DIC display. The low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel clusterand the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningmessage on the DIC will appear at each ignition

cycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Operation and Displays on page 195 andDIC Warnings and Messages on page 199.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the tire pressure monitor light, located onthe instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message will appear when thevehicle is first started, and then turn off as youstart to drive the vehicle. This could be anearly indicator that the tire pressures are gettinglow and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and inflatedto the inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

391

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

392

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternatetires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

The Tire and Loading Information label(tire information placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 388. For the location of the tire and loadinginformation label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 296.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 396 and Tires on page 380.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s sidefront tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’sside rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched toeach tire/wheel position by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure. When increasingthe tire’s pressure, do not exceed the maximuminflation pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

393

You will have two minutes to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match allfour tire and wheel positions the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlinedbelow:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Turn the headlamp control from off to parkinglamps four times within three seconds.A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMSlow tire warning light will begin to flash.The double horn chirp and flashing TPMSwarning light indicate that the TPMS matchingprocess has started. The TPMS warninglight should continue flashing throughout thematching procedure.

4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from the valve capstem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressurefor 10 seconds, then stop and listen for asingle horn chirp. The single horn chirp shouldsound within 15 seconds, confirming thatthe sensor identification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheel position.If you do not hear the confirming single hornchirp, you will need to start over with stepnumber one. To let air-pressure out of a tireyou can use the pointed end of the valve cap,a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

394

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, check to see if theTPMS warning light is still flashing. If yes, turnthe ignition switch to LOCK to exit thesensor matching process. If the TPMS warninglight is not flashing, the five minute timelimit has passed and you will need to start theprocess over beginning with Step 1.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will bedisplayed on the DIC screen. This message shouldgo off once you re-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


395

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 397and Wheel Replacement on page 402 for moreinformation.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable. For information on storing or removingthe spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire onpage 406.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 450.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 296, for an example ofthe label and its location on your vehicle.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors will need to be reset after a tire rotation.See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 391.

396

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 445.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 406.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining. Somecommercial trucktires may not havetreadwear indicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

397

Buying New TiresThe original equipment tires installed on yourvehicle, when it was new, were designed to meetthe Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec) system rating. If you needreplacement tires, Saab strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give the same performanceand vehicle safety, during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

The exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. The TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.

If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will be followed by a MS,for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 381 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires) the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on yourvehicle’s wheels.

398

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 391.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label.

399

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, antilock brakes; traction control;and stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saab specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aSaab certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 398 andAccessories and Modifications on page 322 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or, to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available may vary with respect tothese grades, they must also conform to federalsafety requirements.

400

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

401

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

402

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 406 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a neworiginal equipment wheel.

403

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash. Use another type oftraction device only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on your vehicleand tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage toyour vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust orremove the device if it is contacting yourvehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Ifyou do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

Accessory InflatorYour vehicle has an accessory inflator system.It can also inflate things like basketballs andbicycle tires. It can also used to inflate the tires tothe proper tire pressure. It is not designed toinflate large objects which will require more thanfive minutes to inflate, such as an air mattress.

The accessory inflatoris located in the rearcompartment onthe driver’s side of thevehicle, behind anaccess cover, and nearthe liftgate opening.

To access the inflator, push in on the tab toremove the cover.

404

You may also have an air inflator kit that islocated in the rear floor storage compartment.It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with three nozzleadapters.

To use the accessory inflator, do the following:

1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapterto the end of the hose if required.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate any object only toits recommended pressure.

2. Attach that end of the hose to the object youwish to inflate.

3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.

4. Press and release the switch to turn the airinflator on. The indicator light will remain onwhen the inflator is running.

The system has an internal clock to preventthe system from overheating. The systemwill allow about five minutes of running time,then the compressor will stop. The indicatorlight will then begin to flash. When the indicatoris off, the inflator can be started again bypressing the switch. If the compressor is stillhot, it may only run for a short time beforeshutting off again.

5. Press and release the switch to turn theinflator off.

Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store itin its proper location. Remove the inflator hosefrom the outlet during loading and unloading. Loadleveling will not function with the inflator hoseattached to the inflator outlet. See ElectronicallyControlled Air Suspension System on page 303 formore information.

To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the backof the cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.

If the indicator light on the accessory inflatorflashes continuously, it could indicate that there isa malfunction in the air suspension system.See Electronically Controlled Air SuspensionSystem on page 303 for more information.

405

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 150 for moreinformation.

406

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

407

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe jacking equipment you will need is storedunder the rear seat on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Rear Seat Operation on page 16for more information.

To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob onthe jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.

The tools you will be using include the wheelwrench (A), wheel blocks (B), extension(s), (socketend) (C), handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).

A. Wheel WrenchB. Hoist ShaftC. ExtensionD. RetainerE. Spare or Flat Tire

(Valve StemPointed Up)

408

The following instructions explain how to removethe underbody-mounted spare located underneathyour vehicle.

Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/tothe storage position under the vehicle whenit is supported by a jack, you could damage thetire and/or your vehicle. Always remove orrestow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass onpage 98 for more information.

2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to theextension (C).

3. Insert the socket end of the extension (C) ona 45 degree angle downward into the hoistdrive shaft hole. It is exposed when therear gate is open and is just above the rearbumper.Be sure the socket end of the extension (C)connects to the hoist shaft (B).

4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare tire. Keep turning the wheelwrench until the spare tire can be pulledout from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 416 for more information.

409

5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable whenthe tire has been completely lowered, and pullit through the wheel opening.

6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

Notice: If you drive away before the spare tireor secondary latch system cable has beenreinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.Always reinstall this cable before driving yourvehicle.

7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. If your vehicle has a wheel cap that coversthe wheel nuts, position the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the notch and pry it off.

410

2. Using the wheelwrench, loosen allthe wheel nuts.Do not removethem yet.

3. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise byhand to raise the jack lift head.

4. Place the handle, extension, and wheelwrench onto the jack.

A. Front Frame/Rear AxleB. JackC. HandleD. ExtensionE. Wheel Wrench

5. Place the jack in the appropriate positionnearest the flat tire.

Front Position Rear Position

411

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe spare tire to fit.

412

7. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheelnuts become loose after time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.



When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from the places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

8. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, and sparewheel.

413

9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mountingsurface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

10. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure therounded end is toward the wheel.

11. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel isheld against the hub. If a nut cannot beturned by hand, use the wheel wrench andsee your dealer as soon as possible.

12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

414

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new originalequipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have the nutstightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 445for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 445 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

13. Use the wrench totighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

415

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off your vehicle if the cableholding the spare tire is damaged. For thesecondary latch to work, the tire must be storedwith the valve stem pointing up. See Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 420for instructions on storing the spare or flat tirecorrectly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from under the spare.

416

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Check under thevehicle to see if thecable is visible.If it is not visible,proceed to Step 6.

2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise untilyou hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground,continue with Step 2 of Removing the SpareTire and Tools on page 408.

5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cableis exposed.

417

6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and thewheel wrench to the jack and place it underthe vehicle towards the front of the rearbumper. Position the center lift point of thejack under the center of the spare tire.

7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jackuntil it lifts the end fitting.

8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tirestops moving upward and is held firmly inplace. The secondary latch has released andthe spare tire is balancing on the jack.

9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare while firmly pulling thejack out from under the spare tire with theother hand.

11. If the spare tire ishanging from thecable, insertthe socket end ofthe extensioninto the hoist shafthole on a 45 degreeangle downward.

418

12. Be sure that the socket end of the extensionconnects to the hoist shaft.

Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare the rest of the way.

13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable andpull it through the wheel opening. Pull thetire out from under the vehicle.

Notice: If you drive away before the spare tireor secondary latch system cable has beenreinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.Always reinstall this cable before driving yourvehicle.

14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thecable back up if the cable is hanging underthe vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it has beenrepaired or replaced.

419

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingup. If the spare tire is stored with thevalve stem pointing downward, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing up.

Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tireshould always be stored under the vehicle withthe hoist. However, storing it that way for anextended period could damage the wheel.To avoid this, always stow the wheel properlywith the valve stem pointing up and havethe wheel repaired as soon as possible.

420

Follow this diagram to store theunderbody-mounted flat or spare tire.

A. Wheel WrenchB. Hoist ShaftC. ExtensionD. RetainerE. Spare or Flat Tire

(Valve StemPointed Up)

1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear ofthe vehicle.

2. Remove the wheel cap, if the vehicle has one,from the flat tire by tapping the backside ofthe wheel cap with the wheel wrench (A).Store in a safe location until the flat tireis repaired. Once the tire is repaired, replacethe wheel cap.

3. Make sure the valve stem is pointed up andto the rear. Then pull the retainer (D) throughthe wheel opening.

4. Put the socket end of the extension (C)through the hole just above the rear bumper ata 45 degree downward angle. Connect thesocket end of the extension to the hoistshaft (B).

5. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the wheelwrench (A) clockwise until you hear two clicksor feel it skip twice. This indicates that thetire is secure and the cable is tight. The sparetire hoist cannot be overtightened.

421

6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire.If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench andsocket end of the extension to tightenthe cable.

7. Return the equipment to the proper locationin the vehicle as shown next.

A. HandleB. Wheel WrenchC. Instruction Label

D. ExtensionE. KnobF. Wheel Blocks and Jack

1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B) andextension (D) in the slots provided.

2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return tothe slot in the tool kit.

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise

to raise the jack head.5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.

422

Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated sparetire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 388 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 296 for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction onhow to remove, install or store a spare tire, seeRemoving the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tireon page 410 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 420.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare is correctly inflated. The spare tireis made to perform well at speeds up to 70 mph(112 km/h) at the recommended inflation pressure,so you can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired orreplaced as soon as you can and installed backonto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will beavailable in case you need it again. Do not mix tiresand wheels of different sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

423

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damage tothe integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

424

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

425

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

426

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 458.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residuecompletely. Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your Saab dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 432. Donot use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and notallowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

427

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 427.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can getSaab-approved cleaning products from yourdealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 432.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finishif they remain on painted surfaces. Wash thevehicle as soon as possible. If necessary,use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safefor painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

428

Windshield, Backglass, andWiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Clean theblade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent.Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum WheelsNotice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlySaab-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

429

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratchesin the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your Saabdealer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your Saab dealer’s body andpaint shop.

430

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should beloosened before being flushed. Your Saabdealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutantscan fall upon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can take two forms:blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, andsmall, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,Saab will repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

431

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

432

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your engine,specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

433

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 80.

HeadlampsThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, onefor each headlamp, in the fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the lamps to turn off. If thishappens, have your headlamp wiring checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

434

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opens, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’thave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without — like theradio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if itis the correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located inthe engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 330for more information on location.

435

Fuses Usage

1 Electronically Controlled AirSuspension

2 Passenger’s Side HeadlampHigh-Beam

Fuses Usage

3 Passenger’s Side HeadlampLow-Beam

4 Trailer Back-Up

4.2L L6 Engine

436

Fuses Usage5 Driver’s Side Headlamp High-Beam6 Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam7 Windshield Wiper8 Automatic Transfer Case9 Windshield Washer

10 Powertrain Control Module B11 Fog Lamps12 Stoplamp13 Cigarette Lighter15 Electric Adjustable Pedals16 Ignition B18 Airbag System19 Electric Brake20 Cooling Fan21 Horn22 Ignition E23 Electronic Throttle Control

Fuses Usage

24 Instrument Panel Cluster/DriverInformation Center (DIC)

25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock

26 Transmission Control Module (TCM)Canister

27 Backup28 Powertrain Control Module 129 Oxygen Sensor30 Air Conditioning31 Truck Body Controller 150 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn52 Hazard Flashers53 Headlamp Driver Module54 Air Injection Reactor Solenoid57 Ignition A159 Regulated Voltage Control

437

J-Case Fuses Usage14 Trailer Stoplamp/Turn Signal32 Trailer33 Anti-lock Brake System34 Ignition A35 Driver’s Side Headlamp36 Blower Motor56 Air Pump58 Passenger’s Side Headlamp

62 Vehicle Stability EnhancementSystem (StabiliTrak®)

Relays Usage37 Headlamp Washer38 Rear Windshield Wiper/Washer39 Fog Lamps40 Horn41 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage42 Windshield Washer43 High-Beam Headlamp44 Air Conditioning45 Cooling Fan46 Headlamp Driver Module47 Starter49 Electric Adjustable Pedals55 Air Injection Reactor Solenoid59 Low-Beam Headlamp60 Ignition 161 Powertrain


Misc. Usage48 Instrument Panel Battery

438

Fuses Usage

1 Electrically Controlled AirSuspension

2 Passenger’s Side HeadlampHigh-Beam

Fuses Usage

3 Passenger’s Side HeadlampLow-Beam

4 Trailer Back-Up

5.3L V8 Engine

439

Fuses Usage5 Driver’s Side Headlamp High-Beam6 Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam7 Windshield Wiper8 Automatic Transfer Case9 Windshield Washer

10 Powertrain Control Module B11 Fog Lamps12 Stoplamp13 Cigarette Lighter14 Ignition Coils

15 Transmission ControlModule/Canister

16 Ignition B18 Airbag System19 Electric Brake20 Cooling Fan21 Horn22 Ignition E23 Electronic Throttle Control

24 Instrument Panel Cluster/DriverInformation Center

Fuses Usage25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock26 Engine 127 Backup28 Engine Control Module 129 Engine Control Module30 Air Conditioning31 Injector Bank A50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn52 Hazard Flashers53 Transmission54 Oxygen Sensor B55 Oxygen Sensor A56 Injector Bank B57 Headlamp Driver Module58 Truck Body Controller 159 Electric Adjustable Pedals61 Ignition A166 Regulated Voltage Control

440

J-Case Fuses Usage17 Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamps32 Trailer33 Anti-lock Brake System34 Ignition A35 Blower Motor36 Driver’s Side Headlamp62 Passenger’s Side Headlamp


Relays Usage37 Headlamp Washer38 Rear Wiper39 Fog Lamps40 Horn41 Fuel Pump42 Windshield Washer

Relays Usage43 High-Beam Headlamp44 Air Conditioning45 Cooling Fan46 Headlamp Driver Module47 Starter49 Electric Adjustable Pedals60 Powertrain63 Low-Beam Headlamp64 Ignition 1

Misc. Usage48 Instrument Panel Battery

441

Rear Underseat Fuse BlockThe rear underseat fuse block is located on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, under the second rowseat. Pull the seat cushion forward to accessthe fuse block.

442

Fuses Usage

01 Passenger Door Control Module

02 Driver Door Control Module

03 Liftgate Module 2

04 Truck Body Controller 3

05 Blank

06 Blank


08 Power Seats

09 Rear Wiper

10 Driver Door Module

11 Amplifier

12 Passenger Door Module

13 Blank

14 Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps

Fuses Usage

15 Blank

16 Vehicle Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

17 Passenger Side Rear ParkingLamps

18 Locks

19 Liftgate Module/Driver Seat Module

20 Blank

21 Locks

23 Blank

24 Unlock

25 Ignition 0

26 Overhead Battery/OnStar® System

27 Rainsense™ Wipers

28 Sunroof

443

Fuses Usage

29 Accessory

30 Parking Lamps

31 Truck Body Controller Accessory


33 Front Wipers

34 Ignition 3

35 Vehicle Stop

36 Transmission Control Module

37 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B

38 Front Parking Lamps

39 Rear Left Turn Signal

40 Heat, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 1

41 Front Right Turn Signal

Fuses Usage

42 Radio

43 Trailer Park

44 Rear Right Turn Signal

45 Blank

46 Auxiliary Power 1

47 Blank

48 Ignition 0

49 Not Used

50 Blank

51 Front Left Turn Signal

52 Brakes


444

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 458 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant charge

amount, see the refrigerant caution label located underthe hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

4.2L L6 Engine 10.8 qt 10.2 L

5.3L V8 Engine 12.2 qt 11.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter

4.2L L6 Engine 7.0 qt 6.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L

Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L

AWD Transfer Case Lubricant 2.0 qt 1.8 L

Transmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.

445

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

VORTEC™ 4.2L L6 S Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

VORTEC™ 5.3L V8 M Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

446

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 448Introduction ............................................... 448Maintenance Requirements ........................ 448Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 448Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 448Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 450Additional Required Services ..................... 452Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 453

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 455At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 455At Least Once a Month ............................. 455At Least Once a Year ............................... 456Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 458Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 460Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 461Maintenance Record .................................. 462

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

447

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help you keep your vehicle ingood working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

448

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourdealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 324.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 450 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 452 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 453 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 323.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourdealer do these jobs.When you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you will know that trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine parts.Owner Checks and Services on page 455 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

449

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 458 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 460.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC messagecomes on, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 199. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer has trainedservice technicians who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.

Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 337 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if themessage comes on within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come onat all for one year.

450

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 334. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 337. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 339. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 396 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once aMonth on page 455.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and addfluid as needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g). •

451

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 339. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnotes (g)and (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (normal service). See footnote (g). •

Automatic transfer case only: Changetransfer case fluid. See footnote (g). • • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug wires.An Emission Control Service. •

452

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuineparts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,a pressure test of the cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser is recommended at leastonce a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

453

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outerliftgate handle pivot points, rear door detent link,roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latchbolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks,and folding seat hardware. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks,and proper installation.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 344 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

454

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your dealer canassist you with these checks and services.Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 458.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 334 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper level cancause damage to your engine not covered byyour warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 344 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 388. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 406.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 396.

455

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 116.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The vehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 116.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift leverout of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), contact yourdealer for service.

456

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try toturn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and property could bedamaged. Make sure there is room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take careto clean thoroughly any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.

457

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets StandardGM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 334.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 344.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Windshield Washer Solvent.


Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

Power Steering Fluid(Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingspecifications.

458


Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingspecifications. With a complete drainand refill add 4 ounces (118 ml)of Limited-Slip Axle LubricantAdditive (Part No. U.S. 1052358,in Canada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 369.

Transfer CaseAUTO-TRAK II Fluid(Part No. U.S. 12378508,in Canada 10953626).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosolmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood and DoorHinges, BodyDoor Hinge

Pins, LiftgateHinge andLinkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel

Door Hinge


Outer TailgateHandle PivotPoints and

Hinges


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease with Teflon,Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

459

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Part Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24208576 TF337

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014C

Engine Oil Filter

4.2 L L6 Engine 89017342 PF61

5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.2L L6 Engine 12598004 41-103

5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985

Wiper Blades

Front – 22 inches (56 cm) 15214346 —

Rear – 13 inches (33 cm) 15262794 —

460

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.2L V6 Engine

5.3L V8 Engine

461

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 448. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 455 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

462

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



463

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



464

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 466Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 466Online Owner Center ................................. 467Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 468Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 468Roadside Assistance Program ................... 469Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 473Collision Damage Repair ........................... 474

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 479Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 479Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 479Reporting Safety Defects to Saab .............. 480Service Publications Ordering Information .... 480

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

465

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Saab. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales orservice departments. Sometimes, however,despite the best intentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If your concern hasnot been resolved to your satisfaction, the followingsteps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner of thedealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, contact the Saab CustomerAssistance Center, in the U.S., by calling1-800-955-9007. In Canada, contactSaab Customer Assistance Centre by calling1-800-263-1999 (English and French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free numberin order to give your inquiry prompt attention.Please have the following information available togive the Customer Assistance Representative:

• Your name, address and daytime phonenumber.

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

466

• The name of the selling dealership andlocation.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

• Nature and details of the problem you areexperiencing.

When contacting Saab, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

If after contacting the Saab Customer AssistanceCenter your concern has not been resolved, pleaserefer to the “Dispute Resolution Process” found inyour Saab Consumer’s Guide.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saabownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saab dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saabusa.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

467

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Saab has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with Saab bydialing: 1-866-612-0380. (TTY users in Canadacan dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesSaab encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Saab, refer to theaddresses below.

United States — Customer AssistanceSaab Customer Assistance CenterSaab Cars USA, Inc.4405-A International BoulevardNorcross, GA 30093

468

www.Saab.com1-800-955-90071-866-612-0380 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada, LimitedCustomer Assistance Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-1999 (English and French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-852–9001

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Saab has a strong commitment to customersatisfaction and has established the Saab RoadsideAssistance Program. As the owner of a new Saabvehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the SaabRoadside Assistance program. This value-addedservice is intended to provide you with peace ofmind as you drive in the city or travel the open roadthroughout the 4 year/50,000 mile term of yourNew Car Limited Warranty..

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

469

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,up to a maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow. If your vehicle will not start,Roadside Assistance will arrange to have yourvehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership.

• Alternative Service There may be times, whenRoadside Assistance cannot provide timelyassistance, your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and youwill be reimbursed up to $100 upon submissionof the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

470

• Trip Interruption Benefits and AssistanceIn the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over 100 miles,for U.S. customers, and 250 kilometres, forCanadian customers, from the original point ofdeparture, you may qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $1000 for U.S. customers, and $500 forCanadian customers, to assist you with some ofthe unplanned expense incurred within threedays of the disablement you may incur whilewaiting for your vehicle to be repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.

In some instances, mechanical failures may becovered under the Saab Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, for U.S. customers, and the duration ofthe Base Warranty, for Canadian customers,of the new Vehicle Limited Warranty. However,any cost for parts and labor not covered bywarranty are the responsibility of the vehicle owneror driver.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. We will make everyattempt to send your personalized trip routingas quickly as possible, but it is best toallow three weeks before your planneddeparture date. Trip routing requests will belimited to six calendar year.We’ll make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it’s best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

471

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we are onlya phone call away. Saab and General Motorsof Canada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Saab and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

472

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to helpthe driver control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. Some information may be storedduring regular operations to facilitate repair ofdetected malfunctions; other information is storedonly in a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called event datarecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theAirbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,

and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. Saab will notaccess information about a crash event or share itwith others other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

473

In addition, once Saab collects or receives data,Saab may:

• use the data for Saab research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-Saab organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, pleasecheck the OnStar® subscription service agreementor manual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine Saab Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine Saab Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine Saab parts can help maintainyour Saab New Vehicle Warranty.

474

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment Saab part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour Saab New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than Saaband may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.

Aftermarket parts are not covered by your SaabNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilitySaab also recommends that you choose acollision repair facility that meets your needsbefore you ever need collision repairs. Your Saabdealer may have a collision repair center withSaab-trained technicians and state of theart equipment, or be able to recommend a collisionrepair center that has Saab-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

475

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your Saab vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your Saab vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith Saab original equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is not available fromyour current insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine Saab Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call SaabRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 469 for moreinformation.

476

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select aSaab dealer or a private collision repair facilityto fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, you willhave to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

477

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, Saab recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine Saabparts or recycled original Saab parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered by yourSaab vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on GenuineSaab parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired with GenuineSaab parts, even if your insurance coverage doesnot pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

478

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

479

Reporting Safety Defects to SaabIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify Saab. Please call the SaabCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-955-9007,or write:

Saab Cars USA, Inc.Saab Customer Assistance Center4405-A International Boulevard

Norcross, GA 30093

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999(English or French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for Saab transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service Saab carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, the Service Bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your Saab dealer orby calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).

480

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plusprocessing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plusprocessing fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model Saab 9-7xvehicles. To request an order form, please specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

481

✍ NOTES

482

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 322Accessory Inflator ........................................ 404Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 166Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 81Additives, Fuel ............................................ 325Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 434Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 110Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 339Air Conditioning ........................................... 167Air Suspension ............................................ 303Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 179Readiness Light ....................................... 178

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 473

Airbag System ............................................... 64Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 81How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 72Passenger Sensing System ....................... 74Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 80What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 72What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 73

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 70Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 67

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 368All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 275All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ....................... 192Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 261Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 261Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 269Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 184Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 429Care of Safety Belts ................................ 427Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 431Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 428Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 423Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 425Finish Care .............................................. 428Finish Damage ......................................... 430Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 426Leather .................................................... 426Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 430Tires ........................................................ 430Underbody Maintenance ........................... 431

483

Appearance Care (cont.)Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 432Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 427Weatherstrips ........................................... 427Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 429Audio System(s) .......................................... 212

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 259Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 261Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 261Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 261Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 243Radio with CD ......................................... 214Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 257Setting the Time ...................................... 213Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 258Understanding Radio Reception ............... 260XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 261

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 161Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 341Operation ................................................. 112

BBattery ........................................................ 361

Electric Power Management ..................... 164Run-Down Protection ............................... 165

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 287Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 269Emergencies ............................................ 271Parking .................................................... 116System Warning Light .............................. 183

Brake Pedal, Throttle ................................... 110Brakes ........................................................ 358Braking ....................................................... 268Braking in Emergencies ............................... 271Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 106Bulb Replacement ....................................... 371

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker andParking Lamps ..................................... 374

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 372Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 371Headlamps ............................................... 372High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 371License Plate Lamps ................................ 376

484

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Replacement Bulbs .................................. 376Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ........... 374Buying New Tires ........................................ 398

CCalibration .......................................... 121, 123California Fuel ............................................. 324California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 322Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 445Carbon Monoxide ............... 98, 119, 291, 305Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 427Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 261Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 261

Cargo Cover ............................................... 142Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 143CD, MP3 ..................................................... 233Center Console Storage Area ...................... 140Chains, Tire ................................................. 404Charging System Light ................................ 182

CheckEngine Light ............................................ 187Gages Warning Light ............................... 192

Check Gas Cap Light .................................. 194Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 329Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 431Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 44Infants and Young Children ........................ 40Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .................................................. 50Older Children ........................................... 38Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Outside Seat Position .................... 57Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Rear Seat Position ...................... 59Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 60Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 48

CleaningAluminum Wheels .................................... 429Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 428Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 425Finish Care .............................................. 428

485

Cleaning (cont.)Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 423Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 426Leather .................................................... 426Tires ........................................................ 430Underbody Maintenance ........................... 431Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 427Weatherstrips ........................................... 427Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 429Climate Control System

Climate Controls Personalization .............. 173Dual Automatic ......................................... 167Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 172Rear ........................................................ 173

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 474Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 35Compass ............................................ 121, 123Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 102Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 268Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 186Heater, Engine ......................................... 110

Cooling System ........................................... 349Cruise Control ............................................. 156

Cruise Control Light .................................... 191Cupholder(s) ................................................ 139Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 468

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 468Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 466Reporting Safety Defects to Saab ............ 480Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 479Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 479Roadside Assistance Program .................. 469Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 480

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 161Defensive Driving ........................................ 264Delayed Locking ............................................ 94Disc, MP3 ................................................... 233Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 323Dome Lamp Override .................................. 163Dome Lamps ............................................... 163

486

DoorDelayed Locking ........................................ 94Locks ......................................................... 92Power Door Locks ..................................... 93Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 94Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 97

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 24

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 194DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 195DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 205DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 199

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 281City .......................................................... 285Defensive ................................................. 264Drunken ................................................... 265Freeway ................................................... 286Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 288In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 282Off-Road .................................................. 281Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 296Winter ...................................................... 291

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 167DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 243

EElectric Power Management ........................ 164Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 434Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 435Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 435Headlamps ............................................... 434Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 435Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 442Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 434

Electronically Controlled Air SuspensionSystem .................................................... 303

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 339Battery ..................................................... 361Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 187Coolant .................................................... 344Coolant Heater ......................................... 110Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 186Drive Belt Routing .................................... 461Engine Compartment Overview ................ 330Exhaust ................................................... 119Fan Noise ................................................ 355Oil ........................................................... 334

487

Engine (cont.)Oil Life System ........................................ 337Overheating ............................................. 347Reduced Power Light ............................... 191Starting .................................................... 108

Entry Lighting .............................................. 164Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 473Exit Lighting ................................................ 164Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 37

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 339Finish Damage ............................................ 430Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 261Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 150Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 153Flat Tire ...................................................... 406Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 406Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 420

FluidAutomatic Transmission ............................ 341Power Steering ........................................ 356Windshield Washer .................................. 357

Fog Lamps .................................................. 162Front Axle ................................................... 370Fuel ............................................................ 324

Additives .................................................. 325California Fuel .......................................... 324Check Gas Cap Light .............................. 194Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 328Filling Your Tank ...................................... 326Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 326Gage ....................................................... 193Gasoline Octane ...................................... 324Gasoline Specifications ............................ 324Low Warning Light ................................... 194

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 435Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 435Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 442Windshield Wiper ..................................... 434

488

GGage

Check Gages Warning Light ..................... 192Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 186Fuel ......................................................... 193Oil Pressure ............................................. 190Speedometer ........................................... 176Tachometer .............................................. 176Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 182

Garage Door Opener .......................... 128, 129Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 324Specifications ........................................... 324

Gate Ajar Light ............................................ 193Glove Box ................................................... 139

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 150Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 371Headlamps ......................................... 160, 372

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 161Bulb Replacement .................................... 371

Headlamps (cont.)Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 161Electrical System ..................................... 434Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 153Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 374Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 372High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 371High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 153On Reminder ........................................... 160Washer .................................................... 156

Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 167Highbeam On Light ..................................... 192High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 390Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 288Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 288Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 329Release ................................................... 329

Horn ............................................................ 150How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23

489

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 107Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 40Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 388Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 148Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 163Cluster ..................................................... 175

JJump Starting .............................................. 362

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 89Keys ............................................................. 87

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 381Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 165Dome ....................................................... 163Dome Lamp Override ............................... 163Electric Power Management ..................... 164Fog .......................................................... 162Reading ................................................... 164

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 50

License Plate Lamps ................................... 376Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................. 98Liftglass/Liftgate ............................................. 98Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 178Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 184Brake System Warning ............................. 183Charging System ..................................... 182Check Gages Warning ............................. 192Check Gas Cap ....................................... 194Cruise Control .......................................... 191Gate Ajar ................................................. 193Highbeam On .......................................... 192

490

Light (cont.)Low Fuel Warning .................................... 194Malfunction Indicator ................................ 187Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 179Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 177Reduced Engine Power ............................ 191Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 177Security ................................................... 191Service All-Wheel-Drive ............................ 192StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 185StabiliTrak® Service .................................. 185Tire Pressure ........................................... 186

LightingEntry ........................................................ 164Exit .......................................................... 164

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 271Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 296Lockout Protection ......................................... 97Locks

Delayed Locking ........................................ 94Door .......................................................... 92Lockout Protection ..................................... 97Power Door ............................................... 93Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 94Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 97

Loss of Control ........................................... 280Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 194Luggage Carrier .......................................... 141Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................ 9

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 452At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 455At Least Once a Month ............................ 455At Least Once a Year .............................. 456Introduction .............................................. 448Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 453Maintenance Record ................................ 462Maintenance Requirements ...................... 448Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 460Owner Checks and Services .................... 455Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 458Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 450Using ....................................................... 448Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 448

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 187

491

Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 11Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 199Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearviewwith Compass ....................................... 123

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 121

Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 124Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 124Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 124Outside Power Mirror ............................... 123

Moonroof ..................................................... 144MP3 ............................................................ 233MyGMLink.com ............................................ 467

NNavigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................. 243New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 106Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 460

OOdometer .................................................... 176Odometer, Trip ............................................ 176Off-Road Driving .......................................... 281Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 278Oil

Engine ..................................................... 334Pressure Gage ......................................... 190

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 337Older Children, Restraints ............................. 38Online Owner Center ................................... 467OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 125Other Warning Devices ................................ 150Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 172Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 166Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 124Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 124Heated Mirrors ......................................... 124Power Mirror ............................................ 123

Overhead Console ....................................... 140Owner Checks and Services ....................... 455Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

492

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 430Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 117Shifting Out of ......................................... 118

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 116Over Things That Burn ............................ 118

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 179Passenger Sensing System ........................... 74Passing ....................................................... 278PASS-Key® III ............................................. 103PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 104Personalization, Climate Controls ................. 173Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 166Door Locks ................................................ 93Electrical System ..................................... 435Lumbar Controls .......................................... 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 13Reduced Engine Light .............................. 191Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 108Seat ............................................................ 9

Power (cont.)Steering Fluid .......................................... 356Windows .................................................. 100

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 37Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 94

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 22

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 347Radios ........................................................ 212

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 261Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 261Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 243Radio with CD ......................................... 214Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 257Setting the Time ...................................... 213Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 258Understanding Reception ......................... 260

493

Reading Lamps ........................................... 164Rear Axle .................................................... 369

Limited-Slip .............................................. 271Rear Climate Control System ...................... 173Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 97Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................ 142Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 35Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 257Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 243Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 16Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 32Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 155Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with Compass .......................................... 123Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 121Reclining Seatbacks, Power .......................... 13Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 458Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 302Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 191Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 90

Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire .......................................... 410

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 408Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 376Replacement, Windshield ............................. 377Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 479Saab ........................................................ 480United States Government ....................... 479

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 82Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 83Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 108Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 32Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 469Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 296Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 461Running the Engine While Parked ............... 120

494

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 177Pretensioners ............................................. 37Reminder Light ........................................ 177

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 427Driver Position ........................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 22Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 35Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 32Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32Safety Belt Extender .................................. 37Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 31Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 450Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 10Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 11Power Lumbar ............................................. 9

Seats (cont.)Power Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 13Power Seats ................................................ 9Rear Seat Operation .................................. 16

Secondary Latch System ............................. 416Securing a Child Restraint

Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 59Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 57Right Front Seat Position ........................... 60

Security Light .............................................. 191Service ........................................................ 322

Accessories and Modifications .................. 322Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 323All-Wheel-Drive Light ................................ 192California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 322Doing Your Own Work ............................. 323Engine Soon Light ................................... 187Publications Ordering Information ............. 480

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 80Setting the Time .......................................... 213Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 430Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 117Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 118Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 152

495

Spare Tire ................................................... 423Accessory Inflator ..................................... 404Installing .................................................. 410Removing ................................................ 408Storing ..................................................... 420

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 445Speedometer ............................................... 176StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 271StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 185StabiliTrak® Service Light ............................. 185Starting Your Engine ................................... 108Steering ...................................................... 276Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 259Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 151Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 140Cupholder(s) ............................................ 139Glove Box ................................................ 139Luggage Carrier ....................................... 141Overhead Console ................................... 140Rear Floor Storage Lid ............................ 142

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 295Sun Visors .................................................. 101Suspension ................................................. 303

TTachometer ................................................. 176Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps ............................. 374

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 258Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 101

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 102PASS-Key® III .......................................... 103PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 104

Throttle, Adjustable ...................................... 110Tilt Wheel .................................................... 151Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 186Tires ........................................................... 380

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 429Buying New Tires ..................................... 398Chains ..................................................... 404Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 406Cleaning .................................................. 430Different Size ........................................... 400High-Speed Operation .............................. 390If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 406Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 388Inflator, Accessory .................................... 404Inspection and Rotation ............................ 396Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 410

496

Tires (cont.)Pressure Monitor System ......................... 391Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 410Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 408Secondary Latch System ......................... 416Spare Tire ................................................ 423Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 420Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 381Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 385Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 400Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 402Wheel Replacement ................................. 402When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 397

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 302Towing a Trailer ....................................... 305Your Vehicle ............................................. 302

TractionLimited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 271StabiliTrak® System ................................. 271

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 341

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 112Trip Odometer ............................................. 176Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 152Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 151

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 260Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 400Universal Home Remote System ........ 128, 129

Operation ........................................ 130, 135

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 268Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 296Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 205Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ........................................ 473Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 433Service Parts Identification Label .............. 433

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 172Visors .......................................................... 101Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 182

497

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 174Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 199Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................ 150Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 402Different Size ........................................... 400Replacement ............................................ 402

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 48Windows ....................................................... 99

Power ...................................................... 100Windshield

Backglass, and Wiper Blades,Cleaning ............................................... 429

Replacement ............................................ 377Washer .................................................... 155

Windshield (cont.)Washer Fluid ........................................... 357Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 377Wiper Fuses ............................................ 434Wipers ..................................................... 154

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 155Winter Driving ............................................. 291

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 239XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 261

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 448

498

2007 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2006-08-28 · Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2006-08-28 · Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this...